Canon Copier Fy8 13Ex 000 Users Manual Ppre

FY8-13EX-000 to the manual ab817b7c-a77d-4ef4-a507-c3ae8fab7819

2015-01-23

: Canon Canon-Copier-Fy8-13Ex-000-Users-Manual-240997 canon-copier-fy8-13ex-000-users-manual-240997 canon pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 389 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

NP6218 SERVICE MANUAL
CONTENTS
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
- I. BASIC CONSTRUCTION
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
- I. BASIC OPERATIONS
- II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Chapter 7
- I. POWER SUPPLY
- II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
APPENDIX

SERVICE

MANUAL

REVISION 0

FY8-13EX-000

MAY 1997

IMPORTANT

THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN, TO SERVE AS A SOURCE OF

REFERENCE FOR WORK IN THE FIELD.

SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY FROM

ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED MATTER.

ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO

THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.

THIS DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED FOR ALL SALES AREAS, AND MAY CONTAIN

INFORMATION NOT APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN AREAS.

Printed in Japan

Imprimé au Japon

Use of this manual should be strictly

supervised to avoid disclosure of

confidential information.

Prepared by

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPT. 1

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIV.

CANON INC.

5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302 Japan

This Service Manual contains the bsic facts and figures about the plain paper copier

NP6218, and is compiled to serve as a handy reference for servicing the machine in the

field.

The NP6218 is designed to enable fully automated copying work and may be

configured with the following accessories:

1. Cassette Feeding Module-B2*

2. Cassette Feeding Module-A2*

3. Control Card IV N

4. ADF-E1

5. Staple Sorter B2/D1

6. MS-B1

7. Remote Diagnostic Device II

This manual is limited to the descriptions of the NP6218, Cassette Feeding Module-

B2/Cassette Feeding Module-A2.

* May not be available in some areas but discussed in this manual.

This Service Manual covers the copier only, and consists of the following chapters:

Chapter 1

General Description

introduces the copier's features and specifications,

shows how to operate the copier, and explains how copies are made.

Chapter 2

Basic Operation

provides outlines of the copier's various mechanical

workings.

Chapter 3

Exposure System

discusses the principles of operation used for the

copier's lens drive unit and scanner drive unit. It also explains the timing

at which these drive units are operated, and shows how they may be

disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 4

Image Formation System

discusses the principles of how images are

formed. It also explains the timing at which the various units involved in

image formation are operated, and shows how they may be

disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 5

Pick-Up/Feeding System

explains the principles used from when copy

paper is picked up to when a copy is delivered in view of the functions of

electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation.

It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and

adjusted.

Chapter 6

Fixing System

explains the principles used to fuse toner images to

transfer media in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units

and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units

may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 7

Externals/Auxiliary Mechanisms

shows the copier's external parts, and

explains the principles used for the copier's various control mechanisms

in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation

to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be

disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 8

Installation

introduces requirements for the site of installation, and shows

how the copier may be installed using step-by-step instructions.

INTRODUCTION

Chapter 9

Maintenance and Servicing

provides tables of periodically replaced parts

and consumables/durables and scheduled servicing charts.

Chapter 10

Troubleshooting

provides tables of maintenance/inspection,

standards/adjustments, and problem identification (image

fault/malfunction).

Appendix contains a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams.

In addition to the above chapters, this SERVICE MANUAL contains a set of

appendixes consisting of a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams.

A separate document entitled SERVICE HANDBOOK is also available for

troubleshooting problems in the copier.

The following rules apply throughout this volume:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the

relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the

timing of operation.

In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive—where a

signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the direction

of the electric signal.

The expression “turn on the power” means flipping on the power switch, closing the

front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which will result in supplying the

machine with power.

2. In the digital circuits, ‘1’ is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is

“High,” while ‘0’ is used to indicate “Low.” (The voltage value, however, differs from

circuit to circuit.)

In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be

checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the

machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the

input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the

loads.

The contents of this manual may be updated from time to time to reflect improvements

rendered to the copier; a Service Information bulletin will be issued as necessary to

cover major changes.

All service persons are expected to be thoroughly familiar with the information

contained in this manual, SERVICE HANDBOOK, and Service Information bulletins, for

quick response to the user’s needs.

System Configuration

The NP6218 may be configured with the following systems options:

iii

ADF-E1

Sends originals one by one from

a stack set on its tray

Stapler Sorter B2/D1, MS-B1

Automatically sorts or (page collation)

or groups up to 10 sets of copies;

with the sorting function,

the sorted copies may

automatically be stapled.

(Not applicable to MS-B1.)

Control Card IV N

Allows the user to control

copy volume.

Cassette Feeding Module-A2

Adds additional two cassettes.

Cassette Feeding Module-B2

Adds an additional cassette.

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

COPYRIGHT  ©  1997  CANON INC. CANON  NP6218  REV.0  MAY 1997  PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)
v
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1  GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I. FEATURES.........................................1-1
II. SPECIFICATIONS ..............................1-2
A. Copier............................................1-2
1. Type..........................................1-2
2. System .....................................1-2
3. Features ...................................1-3
4. Others.......................................1-4
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/
Cassette Feeding Module-A2........1-5
III. NAMES OF PARTS ............................1-6
A. Exterior View .................................1-6
B. Cross Section ................................1-7
1. Body .........................................1-7
2. Cassette Feeding Module-A2...1-8
IV. OPERATION.......................................1-9
A. Control Panel.................................1-9
B. Operation Mode.............................1-10
C. Making Two-Sided/Overlay 
Copies (manual) ............................1-11
D. User Mode.....................................1-12
1. Outline ......................................1-12
2. Common Operations ................1-13
3. Changing the Auto Clear 
Time ( ) ..............................1-13
4. Changing the Auto Power-Off 
Time ( ) ..............................1-13
5. Zoom Fine-Adjustment ( )..1-14
6. Turning On and Off the Auto
Cassette Change Mechanism 
( ) .......................................1-15
7. Turning On/Off the Auto Sort/
Non-Sort (with ADF and sorter
installed—option) ( ) ..........1-16
8. Cleaning the Feeder (with ADF
installed—option) ( ) ..........1-16
9. Selecting the Density 
Adjustment Method for 
Standard Mode ( ) .............1-17
10.Initializing User Mode ( )....1-17
11.Quick Guide to User Mode.......1-18
E. Handling the Toner Bottle..............1-19
V. WARNINGS AND ACTIONS ..............1-19
VI. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE 
USER..................................................1-19
VII. IMAGE FORMATION..........................1-20
A. Outline ...........................................1-20
CHAPTER 2  BASIC OPERATION
I. BASIC CONSTRUCTION...................2-1
A. Functional Construction.................2-1
B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry...2-2
C. Basic Sequence of Operations 
(2 copies continuous, AE) .............2-3
D. Main Motor Control Circuit.............2-4
1. Outline ......................................2-4
2. Mechanism ...............................2-4
E. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB ...2-5
1. Inputs to the DC Controller 
PCB (1/3)..................................2-5
2. Inputs to the DC Controller 
PCB (2/3)..................................2-6
3. Inputs to the DC Controller 
PCB (3/3)..................................2-7
F. Outputs from the DC Controller 
PCB ...............................................2-8
1. Outputs from the DC 
Controller PCB (1/3).................2-8
2. Outputs from the DC 
Controller PCB (2/3).................2-9
3. Outputs from the DC 
Controller PCB (3/3).................2-10
G. Inputs to and Outputs from the 
1-Cassette Unit Driver PCB...........2-11
1. Inputs to and Outputs from 
the 1-Cassette Unit Driver 
PCB (1/1)..................................2-11
H. Inputs to and Outputs from the 
2-Cassette Unit Driver PCB...........2-12
1. Inputs to and Outputs from 
the 2-Cassette Unit Driver 
PCB (1/2)..................................2-12
2. Inputs to and Outputs from 
the 2-Cassette Unit Driver 
PCB (2/2)..................................2-13

I. PROCESSES .....................................4-1

A. Outline ...........................................4-1

B. Basic Sequence of Operations

(image formation system)..............4-3

C. Controlling the Scanning Lamp .....4-4

1. Outline ......................................4-4

2. Turning On and Off the

Scanning Lamp ........................4-5

3. Pre-Heating Control

(scanning lamp)........................4-5

4. Sequence of Operations

(scanning lamp pre-heating

control; AE, A4, continuous,

2 copies)...................................4-5

5. Controlling the Intensity of the

Scanning Lamp (FL1)...............4-7

6. Controlling the Fluorescent

Lamp Heater.............................4-8

7. Fluorescent Lamp Automatic ...4-9

8. Fluorescent Lamp Protection

Mechanism ...............................4-9

D. Controlling the Primary Charging

Roller Bias .....................................4-10

1. Outline ......................................4-10

2. Turning On and Off the Primary

Charging Roller Bias ................4-11

3. Controlling the Primary

Charging Roller Bias to a

Constant Voltage ......................4-11

4. Switching the Primary Charging

Roller Bias Application Voltage

Level .........................................4-11

5. Application Voltage Level

(APVC) for the Primary

Charging Roller and Scanning

Lamp On Voltage Level

Automatic Correction................4-12

E. Controlling the Transfer Roller Bias...4-13

1. Outline ......................................4-13

2. Turning On and Off the

Transfer Roller Bias..................4-15

3. Controlling the Transfer Bias

to a Constant Voltage...............4-15

4. Controlling the Transfer Bias

Voltage Level Correction

(ATVC control) ..........................4-15

5. Current Limiter Circuit

(transfer bias) ...........................4-15

6. Current Limiter Circuit

(cleaning bias)..........................4-15

F. Controlling the Static Eliminator

Bias................................................4-16

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. BASIC OPERATION ...........................3-1

A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio ....3-1

II. LENS DRIVE SYSTEM ......................3-1

A. Outline ...........................................3-1

B. Lens Motor Drive Circuit................3-3

1. Keeping the Lens Motor

Stationary .................................3-3

2. Driving the Lens Motor.............3-3

C. Basic Sequence of Operations

(lens drive system; non-Direct)......3-4

III. SCANNING DRIVE SYSTEM.............3-5

A. Driving the Scanner.......................3-5

1. Outline ......................................3-5

2. Relationship between the

Scanner Sensor and Signals....3-6

3. Basic Sequence of

Operations (scanner)................3-6

4. Driving the Scanner Motor .......3-7

5. Scanner Operations in Page

Separation Mode (non-AE,

page separation, A4, 2 copies)..3-8

IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......3-9

A. Scanner Drive Assembly ...............3-9

1. Detaching the Scanner Drive

Motor ........................................3-9

2. Detaching the Scanner Cable ..3-10

3. Assembling the Mirror

Position Tool .............................3-12

4. Routing the Scanner Cable......3-13

5. Adjusting the Position of the

Mirrors (optical length of No.

1, 2, and 3 mirrors)...................3-16

6. Cleaning the Scanner No. 6

Mirror ........................................3-17

B. Lens Drive Assembly.....................3-18

1. Detaching the Lens Drive

Motor ........................................3-18

2. Routing the Lens Cable............3-20

3. Adjusting the Position of the

Change Solenoid......................3-21

vii

1. Outline ......................................4-16

2. Switching the Static Eliminator

Bias Voltage Level ....................4-17

3. Ensuring Proper Separation of

Thin Paper................................4-17

G. Controlling Blank Exposure...........4-18

1. Outline ......................................4-18

2. Blanking (Whiting) of Non-

Image Areas for Reduction.......4-19

3. Blanking (Whiting) Out the

Leading/Trailing Edges and

between Copies........................4-19

H. Controlling the Primary Corona

Roller Cleaning Mechanism ..........4-20

1. Outline ......................................4-20

2. Primary Charging Roller

Cleaning Operation ..................4-20

I. Releasing the Transfer Roller ........4-21

1. Outline ......................................4-21

II. DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY AND

CLEANING ASSEMBLY .....................4-22

A. Outline ...........................................4-22

B. Controlling the Toner Level

Detection .......................................4-23

C. Controlling the Development

Bias................................................4-25

1. Outline ......................................4-25

2. Turning On and Off the DC

Component of the Developing

Bias and Controlling the

Voltage to a Constant Level .....4-25

3. Turning On and Off the AC

Component of the

Development Bias ....................4-26

4. Controlling the Voltage Level

of the DC Component of the

Development Bias ....................4-26

D. Automatic Control of Copy

Density...........................................4-27

1. Outline ......................................4-27

2. Control Method.........................4-27

3. AE Adjustment..........................4-29

III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......4-30

A. Illumination Assembly....................4-30

1. Detaching the Scanning

Lamp/Fluorescent Lamp

Heater.......................................4-30

2. Points to Note When Attaching

the Fluorescent Lamp

Heater/Scanning Lamp.............4-32

3. Detaching the Blank Exposure

Assembly..................................4-34

4. Detaching the Blank Exposure

Lamp ........................................4-35

5. Detaching the Blank Shutter

Solenoid ...................................4-36

6. Positioning the Blank Shutter

Solenoid ...................................4-37

7. Routing the Blanking Cable......4-38

8. Positioning the Left/Right

Margin ......................................4-38

B. Drum Unit ......................................4-39

1. Detaching the Drum Unit..........4-39

2. Cleaning ...................................4-40

C. Primary Corona Assembly.............4-41

1. Detaching the Primary Corona

Assembly..................................4-41

2. Cleaning the Cleaning Pad and

the Primary Corona Roller .......4-42

3. Positioning the Solenoid for the

Primary Charging Roller...........4-43

D. Transfer Charging Assembly .........4-44

1. Detaching the Transfer Roller...4-44

2. Attaching the Drum Heater.......4-44

E. Developing System........................4-47

1. Removing the Developing

Assembly..................................4-47

2. Removing the Blade

Assembly..................................4-47

3. Removing the Developing

Cylinder Side Seal....................4-48

4. Installing the Side Seal and

the Blade Assembly..................4-51

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ............5-1

A. Outline ...........................................5-1

II. PICK-UP OPERATION (COPIER)......5-3

A. Outline ...........................................5-3

B. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/

feeding assembly; A4, 2 copies)....5-4

III. PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE

FEEDING MODULE-A2......................5-5

A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-5

B. Sequence of Operations

(cassette 2; A4, 2 copies)..............5-6

IV. MULTIFEEDER...................................5-7

A. Outline ...........................................5-7

B. Identifying the Size of Paper on

the Multifeeder...............................5-8

C. Sequence of Operations

(multifeeder; A4, 2 copies).............5-9

V. IDENTIFYING THE CASSETTE

SIZE....................................................5-10

VI. IDENTIFYING JAMS ..........................5-12

A. Pre-Registration Delay Jam...........5-12

B. Pre-Registration Timing Jam .........5-13

viii

C. Pre-Registration Stationary Jam ...5-13

D. Separation Delay Jam ...................5-14

E. Separation Stationary Jam............5-14

F. Delivery Delay Jam........................5-15

G. Delivery Stationary Jam ................5-15

VII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......5-16

A. Pick-Up Assembly .........................5-16

1. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller

Unit ...........................................5-16

2. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller...5-19

3. Points to Note When Attaching

the Pick-Up Roller ....................5-20

4. Detaching the Pick-Up Clutch...5-20

5. Detaching the Separation Pad..5-21

6. Adjusting the Left/Right

Registration ..............................5-22

B. Multifeeder Assembly ....................5-23

1. Detaching the Multifeeder

Assembly..................................5-23

2. Detaching the Multifeeder

Pick-Up Roller Unit...................5-24

3. Detaching the Multifeeder

Pick-Up Roller ..........................5-25

4. Points to Keep Note When

Attaching the Multifeeder

Pick-Up Roller ..........................5-26

5. Detaching the Separation Pad..5-26

6. Detaching the Multifeeder

Drive Unit..................................5-27

7. Detaching the Multifeeder

Clutch .......................................5-28

8. Positioning the Multifeeder

Assembly (paper guide plate

cam) .........................................5-29

9. Adjusting the Left/Right

Registration ..............................5-30

10.Points to Note When Attaching

the Multifeeder Assembly Rack

Plate .........................................5-30

C. Registration Roller Assembly ........5-31

1. Detaching the Registration

Clutch .......................................5-31

2. Detaching the Upper

Registration Roller....................5-31

3. Detaching the Lower

Registration Roller....................5-33

D. Feeding Assembly.........................5-34

1. Detaching the Feeding Belt......5-34

E. Cassette Unit.................................5-36

1. Detaching the Copier from

the Cassette Unit......................5-36

2. Detaching/Attaching the

Pick-Up Roller ..........................5-36

3. Detaching the Pick-Up Clutch ..5-36

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

I. BASIC OPERATIONS.........................6-1

A. Outline ...........................................6-1

B. Controlling the Fixing Heater

Temperature ..................................6-3

C. Controlling the Supply Power for

the Fixing Heater...........................6-5

D. Detecting Overheating at the End

of the Fixing Heater.......................6-6

E. Protection Mechanism...................6-6

1. Thermistor (TH1, TH2) .............6-6

2. Thermal Fuse (FU1).................6-6

3. Heater ON Detection Circuit

(230V model only) ....................6-6

F. Correcting Displacement of the

Fixing Film .....................................6-7

1. Outline ......................................6-7

2. Controlling the Fixing Film

Motor ........................................6-10

II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......6-11

A. Fixing Assembly ............................6-11

1. Construction1 ...........................6-11

2. Detaching the Upper Fixing

Unit ...........................................6-12

3. Detaching the Fixing Film,

Tension Roller, Drive Roller,

Fixing Cleaning Brush, and

Fixing Heater Unit ....................6-13

4. Points to Note When Attaching

the Fixing Film .........................6-20

5. Points to Note When Attaching

the Heater Connector...............6-20

6. Points to Note When Replacing

the Fixing Upper Unit ...............6-21

7. Adjusting the Fixing Film Drive

Roller Pressure.........................6-21

8. Detaching the Lower Fixing

Unit ...........................................6-23

9. Detaching the Separation

Claw/Lower Fixing Claw and

Fixing Cleaning Roller ..............6-24

10.Adjusting the Lower Fixing

Roller Nip..................................6-25

B. Delivery Assembly.........................6-27

COPYRIGHT  ©  1997  CANON INC. CANON  NP6218  REV.0  MAY 1997  PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)
ix
CHAPTER 7  EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
I. POWER SUPPLY ...............................7-1
A. Outline ...........................................7-1
B. Power Supply Circuit Assembly.....7-2
C. Detecting Errors in the Power 
Supply PCB ...................................7-4
1. Communication Error between 
DC Controller PCB and 
Composite Power Supply PCB ..7-4
2. Error in the High-Voltage 
Output Data..............................7-4
3. Low-Voltage Output Data Error..7-4
4. Overcurrent in the Low-voltage 
Power Supply ...........................7-4
D. Protection Mechanisms for the 
Power Supply Circuit .....................7-5
II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......7-6
A. External Covers.............................7-6
B. Control Panel.................................7-9
1. Detaching the Control Panel ....7-9
C. Fans...............................................7-10
1. Detaching the Exhaust Fan......7-10
D. Main Motor/Main Drive Assembly..7-11
1. Detaching the Main Motor Unit..7-11
2. Detaching the Main Drive 
Assembly..................................7-11
3. Routing the Drive Belt ..............7-13
E. Cassette unit .................................7-14
1. Detaching the Pick-Up Drive 
Unit ...........................................7-14
2. Detaching the Cassette Motor..7-15
3. Detaching the Cassette Driver 
PCB ..........................................7-16
F. DC Controller PCB ........................7-17
1. Detaching the DC Controller 
PCB ..........................................7-17
2. Points to Note When 
Replacing the DC Controller 
PCB ..........................................7-17
G. Composite Power Supply PCB......7-18
1. Detaching the Composite 
Power Supply PCB...................7-18
2. Points to Note When Handling 
the Composite Power Supply 
PCB ..........................................7-20
H. AE Sensor PCB.............................7-21
1. Points to Note When 
Replacing the AE Sensor.........7-21
I. Intensity Sensor PCB ....................7-21
1. Points to Note When Replacing
the Intensity Sensor .................7-21
I. SELECTING THE SITE ......................8-1
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING 
THE COPIER......................................8-2
A. Unpacking and Removing Fixings..8-2
B. Turning On the Copier ...................8-5
C. Checking the Images and 
Operations.....................................8-8
D. Attaching the Drum Unit ................8-9
E. Changing the Cassette Size..........8-10
III. RELOCATING THE COPIER..............8-13
IV. REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT..........8-14
V. INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD 
IV N.....................................................8-17
VI. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5 
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...........8-19
A. Unpacking......................................8-19
B. Installation (to a Cassette 
Feeding Module-A2/B2).................8-20
VII. INSTALLING THE REMOTE 
DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II....................8-26
A. Unpacking......................................8-26
B. Installation to the Copier ...............8-27
CHAPTER 8  INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 9  MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED 
PARTS ................................................9-1
A. Periodically Replaced Parts...........9-1
II. DURABLES ........................................9-2
A. Copier............................................9-2
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/
Cassette Feeding Module-A2........9-3
III. PERIODICAL SERVICING .................9-4
IV. SERVICING CHART...........................9-5
V. NOTES ON DRUM KIT ......................9-6

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION..10-3

A. Image Adjustment Basic

Procedure....................................10-3

B. Periodical Servicing.....................10-4

II. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS..10-5

A. Image Adjustment .......................10-5

1. Adjusting the Image Leading

Edge Margin ([3], No.305;

registration ON timing) ...........10-5

2. Adjusting the Leading Edge

Non-Image Width ([3], No.

306; blank shutter ON

timing).....................................10-6

3. Adjusting the Image Trailling

Edge Non-Image Width ([3],

No.309; blank shutter

timing).....................................10-7

4. Adjusting the Left/Right

Registration ............................10-8

5. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin

(No.311; left/right margin).......10-9

6. Adjusting the Scanning Lamp

Intensity..................................10-10

7. AE Adjustment .......................10-11

B. Exposure System ........................10-15

1. Routing the Scanner Drive

Cable......................................10-15

2. Adjusting the Mirror Position

optical distance between No.1

mirror and No.2/No.3 mirror) ..10-16

3. Adjusting the Scanner Cable

Tension ...................................10-17

4. Assembling the Mirror

Positioning Tool ......................10-17

5. Points to Note When Attaching

the Fluorescent Lamp Heater/

Scanning Lamp ......................10-18

6. Positioning the Change

Solenoid .................................10-20

C. Image Formation System ............10-21

1. Positioning the Blank Shutter

Solenoid .................................10-21

2. Routing the Blank Shutter

Cable......................................10-22

3. Positioning the Solenoid for the

Primary Charging Roller.........10-22

4. After Replacing the Drum

Unit.........................................10-23

5. Attaching the Drum Heater ....10-23

D. Pick-Up/Feeding System.............10-25

1. Orientation of the Pick-Up

Roller......................................10-25

2. Orientation of the Multifeeder

Pick-up Roller.........................10-25

3. Positioning the paper Guide

Plate Cam (multifeeder) .........10-26

E. Fixing System..............................10-27

1. Points to Note when Attaching

the Fixing Film........................10-27

2. Points to Note when Attaching

the Heater Connector.............10-27

3. Adjusting the Fixing Film Drive

Roller Pressure ......................10-28

4. Points to Note after Replacing

the Fixing Upper Unit .............10-29

5. Adjusting the Nip....................10-30

6. Routing the Drive Belt ............10-31

7. Storing the Fixing Heater

Registance .............................10-31

8. Setting the Fixing Heater

Temperature Control Value.....10-32

F. Electrical......................................10-35

1. After Replacing the PCB ........10-35

2. Clearing the Back-Up RAM....10-35

3. Checking the

Photointerrupters....................10-36

4. Adjusting the Multifeeder

Paper width Sensor................10-43

5. Setting the Paper Size for the

Universal Cassette .................10-44

III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE

FAULTS.............................................10-45

A. Initial Checks...............................10-45

1. Site Environment....................10-45

2. Checking the Originals...........10-45

3. Checking the Copyboard

Cover and the Copyboard

Glass ......................................10-45

4. Checking the Paper................10-45

5. Others.....................................10-46

B. Samples of Image Faults.............10-48

C. Troubleshooting Faulty Images....10-49

1. The copy is too light

(half-tone only). ......................10-49

2. The copy is too light

(black solid also).....................10-50

3. The copy is too light

(overall, extremely).................10-50

4. The copy has uneven density

(front too dark)........................10-52

5. The copy has uneven density

(front too light)........................10-52

6. The copy is foggy (overall). ....10-53

7. The copy is foggy (vertical). ...10-54

8. The copy has black lines

(vertical; thick fuzzy lines). .....10-54

9. The copy has black lines

(vertical, fine)..........................10-54

10.The copy has white spot

(vertical)..................................10-55

11.The copy has white lines

(vertical)..................................10-55

12.The copy has white spots

(horizontal). ............................10-56

13.The back of the copy is

soiled......................................10-57

14.The copy has a fixing fault. ....10-58

15.The leading edge of the copy

is displaced. ...........................10-58

16.The leading edge of the copy

is displaced. ...........................10-58

17.The leading edge of the copy

is displaced. ...........................10-58

18.The copy has a blurred

image......................................10-59

19.The copy is foggy

(horizontal). ............................10-60

20.The copy has poor

sharpness...............................10-61

21.The copy is blank. ..................10-62

22.The copy is solid black. ..........10-62

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING

MALFUNCTIONS .............................10-63

A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions......10-63

1. E000.......................................10-63

2. E001.......................................10-64

3. E002, E003 ............................10-64

4. E004.......................................10-65

5. E007.......................................10-65

6. E010.......................................10-66

7. E030.......................................10-66

8. E064.......................................10-67

9. E202 (keys on control panel

invalidated) .............................10-67

10.E210.......................................10-68

11.E220.......................................10-68

12.E240.......................................10-68

13.E261.......................................10-69

14.E710, E711, E712, E717 .......10-69

15.E803.......................................10-69

16.AC power supply is absent.....10-70

17.DC power supply is absent. ...10-71

18.The blank shutter fails to

move.......................................10-72

19.The photosensitive drum fails

to rotate. .................................10-72

20.The pick-up operation fails

(from cassette). ......................10-73

21.The pick-up operation from

the multifeeder fails. ...............10-73

22.The scanner fails to move

forward/in reverse...................10-74

23.The registration roller fails to

rotate. .....................................10-74

24.The scanning lamp fails to

turn on. ...................................10-75

25.The lens fails to move. ...........10-75

26.The fixing heater fails to

operate. ..................................10-76

27.The pre-exposure lamp fails

to turn on................................10-76

28.The add paper indicator fails

to turn off................................10-76

29 The jam message fails to turn

off. ..........................................10-77

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING

PROBLEMS.....................................10-78

A. Jams (copy paper).......................10-78

1. Pick-Up Assembly ..................10-79

2. Separation/Feeding

Assembly................................10-80

3. Fixing/Delivery Assembly .......10-80

B. Feeding Faults.............................10-81

1. Double feeding .......................10-81

2. Wrinkling.................................10-81

VI. ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS

OF THE ELECTRICAL PARTS.........10-82

A. Sensors .......................................10-82

B. Clutches, Solenoids, and

Switches ......................................10-84

C. Motors, Heaters, and Lamps.......10-86

D. PCBs ...........................................10-88

E. Cassette Feeding Module-A2......10-90

F. Variable Registors (VR) and

check Pins by PCB......................10-92

1. DC controller PCB..................10-92

2. Composite power supply

PCB........................................10-93

VII. SERVICE MODE ..............................10-94

A. Outline .........................................10-94

B. Using Service Mode....................10-94

1. Activating Service Mode.........10-94

2. Selecting a Service Mode ......10-95

3. Selecting Items.......................10-95

4. Using Adjustment Mode [3]

and Specification Mode [5].....10-95

5. Using Operation/Inspection

Mode [4] .................................10-95

6. Clearing Stored Error .............10-95

7. Recording on the Service

Mode Label ............................10-96

C. Control Display Mode [1].............10-97

D. I/O Mode [2] ................................10-99

E. Adjustment Mode [3] ...................10-102

F. Operation/Inspection Mode [4] ....10-105

G. Specification Settings Mode [5]...10-107

H. Counter Mode [6] ........................10-108

VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS............................10-109

A. Copier..........................................10-109

B. Self Diagnosis (ADF)...................10-113

C. Self Diagnosis (Sorter)................10-114

xii

APPENDIX

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART................A-1

B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS......A-2

C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.........A-3

not available

D. SPECIAL TOOLS................................A-5

E. SOLVENTS/OILS................................A-6

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

I. FEATURES.........................................1-1

II. SPECIFICATIONS ..............................1-2

A. Copier............................................1-2

B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/

Cassette Feeding Module-A2........1-5

III. NAMES OF PARTS ............................1-6

A. Exterior View .................................1-6

B. Cross Section ................................1-7

IV. OPERATION.......................................1-9

A. Control Panel.................................1-9

B. Operation Mode.............................1-10

C. Making Two-Sided/Overlay

Copies (manual) ............................1-11

D. User Mode.....................................1-12

E. Handling the Toner Bottle..............1-19

V. WARNINGS AND ACTIONS...............1-19

VI. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE

USER..................................................1-19

VII. IMAGE FORMATION..........................1-20

A. Outline ...........................................1-20

This chapter introduces features and specifications, and explains how the machines are operated

and copies are made.

I. FEATURES

The copier becomes ready to make copies as soon as it is turned on. When fitted

with options, it provides a maximum of four paper sources.

1. Multiple front loading and multifeeder for space saving.

• The cassette may be slid out to the front for paper supply work.

• With the adjustable cassette and the multifeeder, various types of paper may be

used.

2. Office amenities and ecology.

• The copier is equipped with a heating mechanism, which makes the copier ready

for copying work at power-on without wait time.

• The copier is designed compact, enabling effective use of office space.

• The use of roller charging has proved to reduce the generation of ozone

significantly. (1/100 to 1/1000 compared to other Canon copiers)

• As the pick-up mechanism, center-reference is adopted in consideration of the use

of recycled paper.

• A significant number of parts are made of plastic in an effort to promote recycling.

• The copier is designed as a clamshell type to facilitate clearing of jammed paper.

3. Dependable high image quality.

• The new HQ (high-quality) toner ensures faithful reproduction of solid black, text,

and photos.

• In addition to Canon’s own single-component toner projection development

method, the use of auto image control (AIC) ensures stable reproduction of images.

4. Practical basic features.

• As many as 18 copies (A4, horizontal) may be made per minute.

• Copies may be as large as A3/Ledger or as small as A5/STMT, accommodating

postcards.

• The AE mechanism promises enhanced reproduction of newspapers or diazo

originals.

• Using page separation mode, a book may be copied with its left and right pages

processed separately.

• Copies may be made in zoom between 49% and 204%.

• The zoom fine-adjustment mechanism ensures better control for faithful

reproduction of originals.

• The auto power-off mechanism helps further saving of energy.

• The interrupt mechanism enables cutting in on a continuous copying session.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-1

II. SPECIFICATIONS

A. Copier

1. Type

2. System

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-2

Item

Body

Copyboard

Light source

Lens

Photosensitive

medium

Description

Desk top

Fixed

Fluorescent lamp

Zoom

OPC (ø30)

Item

Copying

Charging

Exposure

Copy density

adjustment

Development

Pick-up

Auto

Manual

Transfer

Separation

Cleaning

Fixing

Description

Indirect electrophotographic

Roller (direct charging)

Slit (moving light source)

Automatic (AE) or manual

Dry (toner projection)

1 cassette

Multifeeder

Roller

Curvature + static eliminator

Cleaning blade

Fixing (by plane-shaped heater; 1100 W max.)

3. Features

Caution:

1. Use Canon-recommended paper.

2. Remove curling before feeding for a second time.

3. Fan out the transparencies before setting them on the multifeeder to prevent

adhesion.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-3

Item

Original type

Maximum original

size

Reproduction ratio

Wait time

First copy

Continuous copying

Copying speed

Copy size

Cassette

Manual

Two-sided/ Manual

overlay

Cassette

Multifeeder

Copy tray

Non-image One-sided

width Multi manual

Auto clear

Auto power-off

Option

Specification

Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)

A3 (297 ×420 mm)/LDG (11" ×17")

Center reference

Direct, 2R2E (Table 1-201)

Zoom 49% to 204%

0 sec

8.2 sec or less (11.6 sec or less at power-on; A4, Direct, non-AE,

from cassette)

100 (max.; upper limit may be varied in service mode)

See Table 1-202.

Cassette: A3/11" ×17" to A5/STMT 3.94" ×5.88"

Manual: A3/11" ×17" to postcard (vertical)

Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), tracing paper (SM1), colored paper,

recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2), ecology paper (80 g/m2)

Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), tracing paper (SM1, GNT80), colored

paper, recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2), ecology paper (80 g/m2),

transparency, postcard, label sheet, thick paper (81 to 128 g/m2)

Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), colored paper, postcard, recycled paper

(64 to 880 g/m2), ecology paper (80 g/m2)

34 mm deep (approx.; about 250 sheets of 80 g/,m2paper),

clawless, front loading (center reference)

5 mm high (max.; about 50 sheets of 80 g/m2), clawless (center

reference)

100 sheets (approx.; A3 size, 80 g/m2)

2.0 ±1.0 mm (leading edge), 2.5 ±1.5 mm (left/right, trailing edge)

2.0 ±1.0 mm (leading edge), 3.5 ±1.5 mm (left/right, trailing edge)

Available (2 min standard; may be varied between 1 to 9 min in 1-

minute increments; may be disabled)

Available (5 min standard; may be varied in user mode to 2, 5, 10,

15, 30, 60, 120 min)

Cassette Feeding Module-B2, Cassette Feeding Module-A2, Control

Card IV N, Stapler Sorter B2/D1, MS-B1 ADF-E1

Copy paper

4. Others

Table 1-201 Standard Reproduction Ratios

Reproduction ratio DIRECT

REDUCE I

REDUCE II

ENLARGE I

ENLARGE II

ZOOM

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-4

Item

Operating environment

Temperature

Humidity

Atmospheric

pressure

Power supply

230 V (50Hz)

Power consumption Maximum

Standby

Continuous

Noise Copying

Standby

Ozone (average over 8 hr)

Dimensions Width

Depth

Height

Weight

Consumables Copy paper

Cartridge

Specifications

7.5°C to 32.5°C/45.5°F to 90.5°F

5% RH to 85% RH

810.6 hPa to 1013.3 hPa (0.8 to 1 atm)

Serial numbers

UCDXXXXX

1.5 kW or less

97.2 kJ per hr (27 wh average; reference only)

2088 kJ (580 wh average; reference only)

49.7 dB or less (1 m front) Sound power level by

—ISO method

0.01 ppm or less (average); 0.02 ppm or less (max.)

585 mm/23.0 in

622 mm/24.5 in

345 mm/13.6 in

48 kg (approx.)

Keep wrapped to protect against humidity.

Avoid direct rays of the sun; keep at 40°C/104°F,

85% RH.

1: 1 (±0.5%)

1: 0.500

1: 0.707

1: 1.414

1: 2.000

49% to 204% (1% increments)

Table 1-202 Copying Speed

Specifications subject to change without notice.

B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/Cassette Feeding Module-A2

Table 1-203

Copies/min

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-5

Reproduction ratio

DIRECT 1: 1 (±0.5%)

REDUCE 1: 0.500 (+1.0%)

1: 0.707 (+1.0%)

ENLARGE 1: 2.000 (+1.0%)

1: 1.414 (+1.0%)

Copy size

A3 (297 ×420)

A4 (210 ×297)

A5 (148 ×210)

A4R (297 ×210)

A5R (210 ×148)

A3 →A5R

A3 →A4R

A4 →A5

A5R →A3

A4R →A3

A5 →A4

Copy paper

Cassette

Power supply

Dimensions

Weight

As per copier.

34 V DC, 24V, 5V (from copier)

Cassette Feeding Module-B2: 585W ×622D ×105H (mm) /23.0in x 24.5in x 8.3in

Cassette Feeding Module-A2: 585W ×622D ×210H (mm) /23.0in x 24.5in x 4.1in

Cassette Feeding Module-B2: 9kg

Cassette Feeding Module-A2:16kg

III. NAMES OF PARTS

A. Exterior View

Figure 1-301

Figure 1-302

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-6

qCopyboard cover

wPower switch

eClip tray

rMultifeeder

tCassette

yFront door

uControl panel

iCopyboard glass

qOpen/close lever

wCopy density correction knob

eStatic eliminator cleaner

rHeater switch

tCopy tray

yStatic eliminator

B. Cross Section

1. Body

Figure 1-303

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-7

qNo. 3 mirror

wNo. 2 mirror

eNo. 1 mirror

rScanning lamp

tCopyboard glass

yCopyboard cover

uLens

iExhaust fan

oPre-exposure lamp

!0 Primary charging roller

!1 Reflecting plate

!2 No. 6 mirror

!3 Developing cylinder

!4 Developing assembly

!5 No. 5 mirror

!6 No. 4 mirror

!7 Multifeeder tray

Multifeeder pick-up roller

!9 Cassette pick-up roller

@0 Registration roller

@1 Transfer roller

Separation static eliminator

@3 Photosensitive drum

@4 Feeding assembly

@5 Cassette

@6 Fixing film

@7 Film tension roller

@8 Film pressure roller

@9 Film drive roller

#0 Delivery roller

2. Cassette Feeding Module-A2

Figure 1-304

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-8

qCassette 2

wCassette 3

eCassette 2 pick-up roller

rCassette 3 pick-up roller

tDrive roller

yFeeding roller

13 5

IV. OPERATION

A. Control Panel

Figure 1-401

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-9

123

456

789

C 0

Max 200%

1:1

Min 50%

A3 A5 A4

A3 A4 A4 A5

1:1

123

Autom. Paper

Autom. Zoom

Zoom

+–

qw er t y u i

o!1!2 !0@1@2 !3!4!5!6!7!8!9@0

qImage Compose key

wPage Separate key

eWarning indicator

rDisplay

t% key

yReset key

uKeypad

iPower switch

oInterrupt key

!0 Clear key

!1 Stop key

!2 Start key

!3 Auto Ratio key

!4 Zoom key

!5 Paper Select key

!6 Cassette/Jam indicator

!7 Direct key

!8 Reduce/Enlarge key

!9 Copy density key

@0 AE key

@1 Sorter key

@2 Sorter indicator

B. Operation Mode

Table 1-401

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-10

Mode

Image Composition

mode

Page Separation

mode

Interrupt mode

Auto Ratio mode

AE mode

Sort/staple

sort/group mode

Description

Press to set/reset image composition mode.

Press to set/reset page separation mode.

Press to interrupt an ongoing copying

session.

Press it to set/reset auto ratio mode.

Press to set/re-set AE mode or user mode.

Press it to select/reset sort, staple sort, or

group mode.

Remarks

Only when an ADF

(accessory) is installed.

Only when an ADF

(accessory) is installed.

Only when an sorter

(accessory) is installed.

C. Making Two-Sided/Overlay Copies (manual)

You can make two-sided or overlay copies by manually feeding paper. You must,

however, keep the following in mind when making such copies:

qBe sure to orient the paper the same way for both sides when turning it over.

wMake sure that the paper has not absorbed moisture.

eMake sure that the paper has no curling.

rAfter copying on the first side, sufficiently cool the paper; then, correct any curling

before feeding it for a second time.

tUse paper of 60 to 128 g/m2.

yCorrect any curling on postcards or thick paper (128 g/m2) before copying on the

second side.

Figure 1-405

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-11

D. User Mode

1. Outline

The copier provides user mode, which allows the user to change various settings or

to make various adjustments on his/her own; see Table 1-402.

Table 1-402

Display

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Menu No.

1-12

Function

Changing the auto

clear time

Changing the auto

power-off time

Fine adjusting

(zoom)

Turning on/off

auto sort/non-sort

(with ADF* and

sorter* installed)

*Accessory

Cleaning the feeder

(with ADF* installed)

Option

Selecting a densi-

ty adjustment

method for

standard mode

Initializing user

mode

Description

You may set the auto clear time

between 1 and 9 min in 1-min

increments. Setting it to ‘0’

disables the function.

You can set the auto power-off

time to either 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60,

or 120 min.

You can correct a slight discrep-

ancy between original and copy

sizes (direct); enlarge in X direc-

tion and reduce in Y direction

independent of each other.

You may specify whether to

evecute auto sort/non-sort.

Use it to clean the pick-up

assembly of the ADF.

You can specify either AE or

manual for density adjustment for

standard mode.

You can return settings changed

in user mode to initial settings.

Default settings

2 min

5 min

± 0%

2. Common Operations

a. Keys to Use in User Mode

• Clear Key

Use it to return to the previous step; or, use it to clear a setting entered by mistake

when making mode settings.

• Start Key

Use it to accept a selected item when making user mode settings.

• AE Key

Use it to return to copy mode when making user mode settings.

b. Operation

1) Hold down the AE key for about 4 sec or more.

• This will turn on the display, indicating “ ”.

2) Enter the menu number of each function using the keypad.

3) Press the Start key.

• The current setting of the respective function appears.

4) Enter a new setting using the appropriate key.

5) Press the start key.

• The copy count/ratio indictor turns on to indicate the user mode being changed.

• The setting of the respective user mode is changed.

6) Press the AE key.

• The copier returns to standby state.

3. Changing the Auto Clear Time ( )

1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.

• “ ” appears on the display.

2) Press the Start key.

• The display indicates the current setting (if initial, indicates ‘1-2’).

3) Enter a desired setting using the keypad.

• The display indicates the new setting (if 5 min, indicates ‘1-5’).

4) Press the Start key. “ ”

5) Press the AE key.

• The copier returns to standby state.

4. Changing the Auto Power-Off Time ( )

1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.

• “ ” appears on the display.

2) Enter ‘2’ using the keypad so that the display indicates “ ”.

3) Press the Start key.

• The display indicates the current setting (if initial, indicates ‘2-2’).

4) Enter a desired setting using the keypad.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-13

Table 1-403

• The display indicates the new setting (if 10 min, indicates ‘2-3’).

5) Press the Start key.

• The auto power-off time is changed, and the display returns to “ ”.

6) Press the AE key.

• The copier returns to standby state.

Reference:

If you want to disable the auto power-off function, use service mode (See p. 10-109.).

5. Zoom Fine-Adjustment ( )

1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.

• The display indicates “ ”.

2) Enter ‘3’ using the keypad so that the display indicates “ ”.

3) Press the Start key.

• The display indicates ‘3-1’ suggesting the direction of adjustment.

Table 1-404

Further, the copy density indicator shows the current setting. (See Figure 1-406.)

4) Press the copy density key to adjust the reproduction ratio in X direction. (See Figure

1-406.)

5) Press the Start key.

• The reproduction ratio in X direction is fine-adjusted, and the display indicates ‘3-

2’.

Further, the copy density indicator shows the current setting. (See Figure 1-406.)

6) Press the Density key to adjust the reproduction ratio in Y direction. (See Figure 1-

406.)

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-14

Auto power-off time (min)

120

Settings

2-1

2-2

2-3

2-4

2-5

2-6

2-7

Direction of adjustment

X direction (horizontal)

Y direction (vertical)

Display

3-1

3-2

7) Press the Start key.

• The zoom reproduction is fine-adjusted, and the display returns to “ ”.

8) Press the AE key.

• The copier returns to standby state.

The fine-adjustment reproduction ratios as shown in the copy density display are as

follows:

■Zoom Fine-Adjustment (Reduce) ■Zoom Fine-Adjustment (Enlarge)

Press the Lighter key. Press the Darker key.

Figure 1-402

6. Turning On and Off the Auto Cassette Change Mechanism ( )

1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.

• The display indicates “ ”.

2) Enter rusing the keypad so that the display indicates “ ”.

3) Press the Start key.

• The display indicates the current setting (if initial setting, ‘4-1’).

Table 1-405

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-15

Initial setting

(±0%)

-0.2%

-0.4%

-0.6%

-0.8%

-1.0%

Initial setting

(±0%)

+0.2%

+0.4%

+0.6%

+0.8%

+1.0%

State of auto cassette change function

Off

Settings

4-1

4-0

4) Enter qor pusing the keypad to specify ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

• The display indicates the new setting (if Off, ‘4-0’.)

5) Press the Start key.

• The auto cassette change function is turned on or off, and the display returns to

“ ”.

6) Press the AE key.

• The copier returns to standby state.

7. Turning On/Off the Auto Sort/Non-Sort (with ADF and sorter installed—option)

( )

1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.

• The display indicates “ ”.

2) Enter tusing the keypad so that the display indicates “ ”.

3) Press the Start key.

The display indicates the current setting (if initial settings, ‘5-1’).

Table 1-406

4) Enter qor pusing the keypad to select On or Off.

• The display indicates the new setting (if Off, ‘5-0’).

5) Press the Start key.

• The auto cassette change will be either On or Off, and the display returns to

“ ”.

6) Press the AE key.

• The copier returns to standby state.

8. Cleaning the Feeder (with ADF installed—option) ( )

1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.

• The display indicates “ ”.

2) Enter yusing the keypad so that the display indicates “ ”.

3) Place about 10 sheets of blank copy paper (white) on the ADF’s original tray.

4) Press the Start key.

• Feeder cleaning starts; to stop, press the Stop key.

During the cleaning operation, “ ” on the display flashes; then, “ ” stops

flashing and remains on.

5) Press the AE key.

• The copier returns to standby state.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-16

Turning on/off the auto cassette change mechanism

Off

Settings

5-1

5-0

9. Selecting the Density Adjustment Method for Standard Mode ( )

1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.

• The display indicates “ ”.

2) Enter ousing the keypad so that the display indicates “ ”.

3) Press the Start key.

• The display indicates ‘9-1’.

Table 1-407

4) Enter qor pusing the keypad to select AE or manual so that the display indicates

the new specification (if manual, indicates ‘9-0’).

5) Press the Start key.

• The new specification is stored, and the display returns to “ ”.

6) Press the AE key.

• The copier returns to standby state.

10.Initializing User Mode ( )

1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.

• The display indicates “ ”.

2) Enter pusing the keypad so that the display indicates “ ”.

3) Press the Start key.

• The display indicates ‘0-1’.

4) Enter pusing the keypad.

• The display indicates “ ”.

5) Press the Start key.

• User mode is initialized, and the display returns to “ ”.

6) Press the AE key.

• The copier returns to standby state.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-17

Selecting the density adjustment method for standard mode

AE (automatic)

Manual

Settings

9-1

9-0

11.Quick Guide to User Mode

Table 1-408

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-18

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-19

E. Handling the Toner Bottle

Instruct the user to dispose of any empty toner bottle as nonflamable material.

Caution:

Do not dispose of the toner bottle into fire.

It may explode.

V. WARNINGS AND ACTIONS

• Handling the Toner Bottle

Instruct the user to dispose of any empty toner bottle as nonflammable material.

Caution:

Do NOT throw the cartridges into fire; it can burst or explode.

VI. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER

Make sure that the user cleans the following parts once a week:

qCopyboard Glass

Use a cloth moistened with water or mild detergent solution; then, dry wipe it.

wCopyboard Cover

Use a cloth moistened with water or mild detergent solution; then, dry wipe it.

eStatic Eliminator

If separation jams occur frequently, use the special brush (accessory) to clean it; the

eliminator need not be cleaned as often as once a week.

VII. IMAGE FORMATION

A. Outline

Figure 1-601

The copier uses an electrostatographic method to produce images and is

constructed as shown in Figure 1-601.

It is equipped with an automatic control mechanism to ensure stable reproduction of

high-quality images.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-20

Copyboard glass

Scanning lamp

Lens

Pre-exposure lamp

Primary corona roller

Developing cylinder

Static eliminator

Transfer roller

Fixing film

Pressure roller

Cleaning assembly Pick-up

(multifeeder)

Pick-up

(cassette)

The NP6218 generates images in the following eight steps.

Step 1. Pre-exposure

Step 2. Primary charging

Step 3. Image exposure

Step 4. Development (AC + positive DC)

Step 5. Transfer (positive DC)

Step 6. Seperation (AC + positive DC)

Step 7. Fixing

Step 8. Drum cleaning

Figure 1-602

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-21

Static latent image formation block

2. Primary charging

1. Pre-exposure

8. Drum Cleaning 5. Transfer

3. Image exposure

4. Development

Manual feeding

Registration

Cassette

flow of copy paper

rotation of drum

6. Separation

Delivery

7. Fixing

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-22

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2

BASIC OPERATION

I. BASIC CONSTRUCTION...................2-1

A. Functional Construction.................2-1

B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry...2-2

C. Basic Sequence of Operations

(2 copies continuous, AE) .............2-3

D. Main Motor Control Circuit.............2-4

E. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB ...2-5

F. Outputs from the DC Controller

PCB ...............................................2-8

G. Inputs to and Outputs from the

1-Cassette Unit Driver PCB...........2-11

H. Inputs to and Outputs from the

2-Cassette Unit Driver PCB...........2-12

This chapter provides outlines of the copier’s various operational workings. (Note that a single

rotation of the drum takes about 0.29 sec.)

I. BASIC CONSTRUCTION

A. Functional Construction

The copier may be divided into four blocks; namely, the pick-up/feeding system,

exposure system, image formation system, and control system.

Figure 2-101

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-1

Control system

Control circuit

assembly

Control

assembly

Tray Fixing

assembly Feeding

assembly

Drum

cleaning

assembly

Primary

charging

Optical

path

Photosensitive

drum

Separation Transfer

Pick-up/feeding

system 1

Pick-up/feeding

system 2

Copyboard Exposure system

Scaning lamp

assembly

Image formation

system

Developing

assembly

Pick-up

control

assembly

Cassette Feeding

module B2

Cassette Feeding

module A2

Manual feed

assembly

Flow of high voltage/toner

Flow of paper

Flow of light

Flow of electrical signals

Cassette 1

B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry

The copier’s principal electrical mechanisms are controlled by the microprocessor on

the DC controller PCB. The microprocessor reads the input signals from the sensors and

operation keys according to the stored program and generates signals used to drive such

loads as motors, solenoids, and lamps.

The microprocessor is capable of reading both digital and analog signals because of

its built-in A/D converter.

Figure 2-102

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-2

Sensor

AE sensor PCB

Main thermistor

Sub thermistor

Control panel

Power switch

Control card (accessory)

Sensor

DC controller PCB

Cassette Driver PCB

(accessory)

Composite power supply

High-

voltage

circuit

ADF (accessory)

Sorter (accessory)

Scanning lamp

heater switch

Options

power

supply

Toner level

detection PCB

Bias PCB Developing

cylinder

Transfer current

Static eliminator

Primary crrent

Main motor

Pre-exposure lamp

Motor

Scanning motor

Lens motor

Fixing film moor

Fan Heat exhaust fan

Change solenoid

Multifeeder holding plate

solenoid

Blank shutter solenoid

Primary charging roller

Creaning solenoid

Transfer charging roller

reversting solenoid

Registration clutch

Delivery clutch

Multifeeder pick-up clutch

Motor Cassette unit motor

Cassette pick-up clutch

CPU

Q301

CPU

Q305

ROM

Q307

RAM

Q314

(for IPC

communi-

cation)

+5V

+24V

+34V

(accessory)

C. Basic Sequence of Operations (2 copies continuous, AE)

Figure 2-103

Table 2-101

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-3

STBY INTR SCFW

Power switch

ON Copy Start key

AER

Main motor (M1)

Fixing heater

Primary charging bias

Transfer bias

Static eliminator bias

Scanning lamp

Scanner

Developing AC bias

Developing DC bias

SCRV SCFW SCRV

LSTR

STBY

1.5sec

STBY (standby)

INTR

(initial rotation)

AER

(AE rotation)

SCFW

(scanner forward)

SCRV

(scanner reverse)

LSTR

(last rotation)

• Between when LSTR is over and

when the Copy Start key is

pressed or the Power switch is

pressed.

• Between when the Power switch

has been pressed and when the

Copy Start key is pressed.

For at least 1 sec after the Copy

Start key has been pressed.

While the scanner is moving for-

ward.

• The distance of forward travel

varies depending on the cassette

size and reproduction ratio.

• The distance of reverse travel

varies depending on the selected

reproduction ratio.

While the scanner is moving in

reverse.

Between when SCRV is over and

when the copy paper moves past the

delivery sensor.

Until the Copy Start key

or another operation key

is pressed.

The drum sensitivity is

stabilized in preparation

for a copy run.

The scanner is moved

about 65 mm forward and

in reverse to measure the

density of the original.

The scanning lamp illumi-

nates the original, and the

reflected optical image is

projected on the photo-

sensitive drum through

mirrors and lenses.

The scanner is returned

to the home position in

preparation for the next

copy run.

The surface of the photo-

sensitive drum is cleaned

using static electricity as

post treatment.

• Upon completion of

LSTR, the indications on

the control panel return

to indications for stan-

dard mode after 2 min.

AE mode only.

The registration signal is

generated to move the

copy paper to the transfer

assembly.

The last copy is

discharged.

Description RemarksPeriod

D. Main Motor Control Circuit

1. Outline

Figure 2-104 shows the circuit used to control the main motor (M1); the circuit has

the following functions:

qturns on and off the main motor.

wcontrols the main motor to a specific rotation speed.

The main motor (M1) is a DC motor that has a built-in clock pulse generator. When

the motor rotates, it generates clock pulse signals (MMCLK*) according to the revolution

of the motor. The speed control circuit matches the phases of the frequency of these

clock pulses and that of the reference signals to control the main motor (M1) to a specific

revolution speed.

2. Mechanism

When the main motor drive signal (MMD) from the DC controller circuit goes ‘1’, the

drive circuit of the motor driver turns on, thereby rotating the main motor (M1) at a

constant speed.

While the main motor is rotating at a specific speed, the motor driver PCB keeps

sending the specific speed state signal=0 (MLOCK*) to the DC controller PCB. If, for

some reason, an irregularity occurs in the rotation of the main motor, the MLOCK* signal

goes ‘1’.

If the main motor drive signal (MMD) remains ‘1’ and the MLOCK*=0 remains

unchanged for about 1 sec, the DC controller identifies a main motor error and stops the

main motor and, at the same time, indicates ‘E010’.

Figure 2-104

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-4

J 501

- 1

- 2

J 502

- 2

J 303

- 3

J 502

- 1

J 303

- 4

+34V

J 206

MMD

MLOCK*

MMCLK

DC controller

PCB

Phase control

circuit

Reference signal

Drive circuit Clock pulse generator

Drive

current

Main motor

Hall IC output

Main motor driver PCB

E. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB

1. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (1/3)

Figure 2-105

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-5

PS 1

Registration

sensor

J307

-3

-2

-1

PS 2 LHP When lens detects home position sensor, '1'.

(when light-blocking plate is at PS2, '1')

Lens home position

sensor

J315

-3

-2

-1

PS 3 BSHP When blank home position sensor detects

the blank shutter, '1'.

(when light-blocking plate is at PS3, '1')

Blank shutter home

position sensor

J313

-7

-9

-8 CPD* When paper is present in multifeeder, '0'.

(when light-blocking plate is not at PS4, '0')

PS 4

Cassette paper

sensor

J313

-1

-3

-2 MFPD* When paper is present in cassette, '0'.

(when light-blocking plate is not at PS5, '0')

PS 5

Multifeeder paper

sensor

J314

-3

-2

-1 RPD

PS 6

J314

-4

-6

-5

FFD When PS9 detects film, '0'.

(when light-blocking plate is at PS9, '1')

PS 7

Fixing film sensor

J304

-13

-12

-11

PS 9

Separation

sensor

DC controller PCB

RDOP* When right door is opened, '0'.

(when light-blocking plate is not at PS10, '0')

Right door open/

closed sensor

J306

-13

-15

-14

PS 10

DPD* When PS8 does not detect paper, '0'.

(when light-blocking plate is not at PS8, '0')

Delivery sensor

J312

-3

-2

-1

PS 8

J311

-3

-2

-1 SCHP When scanner is at home position, '1'.

(when light-blocking plate is at PS1, '1')

Scanner home

position sensor

When PS6 detects paper, '1'.

(when light-blocking-plate is at PS6, '1')

SPD* When PS7 detects paper, '0'.

(when light-blocking plate is not at PS 7, '0')

2. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (2/3)

Figure 2-106

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-6

See p. 6-1.

J651

-6

-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

J314

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

J313

-4

-5

-6

J304

-3

-4

J304

-1

-2

J309

J310

J801

J802

CSZ_1

CSZ_2

CSZ_3

CSZ_4

Cassette size

sensor

Control panel

Main switch

Multifeeder paper

width detection

Main thermistor

(TH1)

Sub thermistor

(TH2)

See p. 5-8.

J601

-1

-2

-3

-4

J307

-7

-6

-5

-4

J604-2

-1

J356-1

-2

AE sensor

See p. 4-27.

See p. 4-4.

J701

-2

-4

-3

-1

J317

-3

-5

-4

-2

Light adjusting

sensor

AEREF

AEVR1

AEVR2

+24V

+24V +5V

L1D

MFPWD

TH1

TH2

VR1

SW829

DC controller PCB

On the control panel PCB, keys and

LEDs are arranged in a matrix; and

the DC controller turns on the LEDs or

reads key input. The main switch is

part of the control panel. (p. 7-2)

Detects the width of copy paper

loaded in the multifeeder.

3. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (3/3)

Figure 2-107

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-7

F. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB

1. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (1/3)

Figure 2-108

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-8

BP102 BP103 BP101

+5V

25V

+5V

+24V

RL102

RL101

Q512

HTON*

PWSW*

TEP*

HTRD

EHTRL*

Cassette heater (H4)

Cassette heater (H5)

Anti-condensation

switch (SW1)

Lens heater (R1)

Fuse (FU1)

Fixing heater

(H1)

Fluorescent lamp heater

switch (SW2)

Fluorescent lamp heater

(H2)

Fluorescent lamp

(FL1)

Primary charging roller

Developing cylinder

Transfer roller

Static eliminator

Door switch

Fixing

heater

driver

Heater

detection

PCB

Toner level

detection

sensor

Thermal

control

circuit

Scanning

lamp control

circuit

High-voltage

circuit

Composite power

supply PCB

Micro-

processor

DC controller PCB

See p. 6-1.

When '0', RL102 turns on

When '0' RL102 turns on.

When L102 turns on,

SW1 turns on,

and heater (R1) turn on.

When '0', RL101

turns on.

(on when power is turned on)

When heater is on, '0'.

Communication with composite

power supply PCB.

When '0',cartridge

indicator turns on.

2. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (2/3)

Figure 2-109

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-9

When '0', registration clutch turns on.

(registration roller rotates)

RGCLD*

DC controller PCB

CL1

+24V

J303

-6

-5

Registration

clutch

When '0', pick-up clutch turns on.

(pick-up roller rotates)

PUCLD1*

CHSLD*

CL2

+24V

J303

-8

-7

Pick-up clutch

When '0', multifeeder pick-up

clutch turns on.

(multifeeder pick-up roller rotates)

MFPUCLD*

CL3

+24V

J306

-9

-10

Multifeeder

pick-up clutch

When '1', solenoid turns off.

(blank width control)

When '0', solenoid turns on.

(lens mount moves)

SL1

+24V

Change

solenoid

When '0', solenoid turns on.

(holding plate released)

When '0', solenoid turns on.

(blank shutter opens)

When '0', solenoid turns on.

(cleaning pad butted)

When '0', solenoid turns on.

(causing transfer roller

to move down)

See p. 5-1.

See p. 3-7.

See p. 3-3.

See p. 6-10.

MLOCK*

MMD

+5V

+34V

J206

-1

-2

J501

-1

-2

J502

-4

-1

-2

-3

J03

-1

-4

-3

-2

J305

Main motor

Scanner motor

Lens motor M3

J306

Main motor

drive PCB

MFSLD*

SL2

+24V

Multifeeder

holding plate

solenoid

BSSLD*

SL3

+24V

Blank shutter

solenoid

PCLSLD*

SL4

+24V

Primary charging

roller cleaning

solenoid

TRSLD*

SL5

+24V

J313

-10

-11

J308

-9

-10

J315

-4

-5

J306

-11

-12

J306

-7

-8

Transfer charging

roller releasing

solenoid

Fixing film motor M4

J304

3. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (3/3)

Figure 2-110

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-10

+24V

J316

-1

-2

J315

-7

-6

J320

-1

J310

-4

-1

-2

-3

J802

-13

-16

-15

-14

J803

-2

-4

-3

-1

-2

J401

-1

-2

HEFD*

+24V

PEXP*

+24V

TCNTD*

+5V

CCD*

CCDT*

Heat exhaust fan

(FM1)

Pre-exposure

lamp

Total copy count

Control

card

IV N

Control

panel

DC controller PCB

When '0', heat exhaust fan on.

(heat exhaust fan rotates)

When '0', the pre-exposure lamp

turns on.

When changes from '0' to '1',

count is incremented.

When '0', count is incremented.

When '0', control card is present.

G. Inputs to and Outputs from the 1-Cassette Unit Driver PCB

1. Inputs to and Outputs from the 1-Cassette Unit Driver PCB (1/1)

Figure 2-111

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-11

J110

-1

-3

-2

J110

-4

-6

-5

PS1cu C2VPD

Cassette 2

vertical path

sensor

PS2cu C2PD

Cassette 2

paper sensor

When PS1 detects paper, '1'.

(when the light-blocking plate

is at PS1cu, '1')

When paper is present in

cassette, '0'.

(when light-blocking plate

is not at PS2cu, '0')

Cassette driver PCB

DC controller PCB

J651

-6

-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

J110

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

CS2

C2SZ_1

C2SZ_2

C2SZ_3

C2SZ_4

Cassette 2

size detection See p. 5-8.

CMA

CMA*

CMB

CMB*

J114

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

Cassette

unit motor

While M1cu is rotating,

alternates between '1' and

'0'. (pulse signal)

When '0', pick-up clutch turns on.

(pick-up roller rotates)

C2PUCLD*

CL1cu

M1cu

+24V

J115

-1

-2

Cassette 2

pick-up clutch

H. Inputs to and Outputs from the 2-Cassette Unit Driver PCB

1. Inputs to and Outputs from the 2-Cassette Unit Driver PCB (1/2)

Figure 2-112

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-12

J110

-1

-3

-2

J110

-4

-6

-5

PS1cu C2UPD

Cassette 2

vertical path

sensor

PS2cu CS2PD*

Cassette 2

sensor

When PS1cu detects paper, '1'.

(when light-blocking plate is at

PS1cu, '1')

When paper is present in cassette, '0'.

(when light-blocking plate is not at

PS2cu, '0')

J120

-13

-15

-14

J120

-10

-12

-11

PS3cu C3VPD

Cassette 3

vertical path

sensor

PS4cu CS3PD*

Cassette 3

paper sensor

When PS3cu detects paper, '1'.

(when light-blocking plate is at PS3cu, '1')

When paper is present in cassette, '0'.

(when light-blocking pale

is not at PS4cu, '0')

J120

-1

-3

-2

PS5cu CRDOP*

Cassette right

door

open/closed

sensor

When right door is opens, '0'.

(when light-blocking plate

is not at PScu, '0')

Cassette driver PCB

DC controller PCB

J651

-6

-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

J110

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

CS2

C2SZ_1

C2SZ_2

C2SZ_3

C2SZ_4

Cassette 2 size

detection See p. 5-8.

J651

-6

-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

J120

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

CS3

C3SZ_1

C3SZ_2

C3SZ_3

C3SZ_4

Cassette 3 size

detection See p. 5-8.

2. Inputs to and Outputs from the 2-Cassette Unit Driver PCB (2/2)

Figure 2-113

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-13

Cassette driver PCB DC controller PCB

CMA

CMA*

CMB

CMB*

J114

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

Cassette

unit motor

While M1cu is rotating,

alternates between '1' and '0'.

(pulse signal)

M1cu

When '0', pick-up clutch turns on.

(pick-up roller rotates)

C2PUCLD*

CL1cu

+24V

J125

-1

-2

Cassette 2

pick-up clutch

When '0', the pick-up clutch turns on.

(pick-up roller rotates)

C4PUCLD*

CL2cu

+24V

J125

-3

-4

Cassette 3

pick-up clutch

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-14

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3

EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. BASIC OPERATION ...........................3-1

A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio ....3-1

II. LENS DRIVE SYSTEM ......................3-1

A. Outline ...........................................3-1

B. Lens Motor Drive Circuit................3-3

C. Basic Sequence of Operations

(lens drive system; non-Direct)......3-4

III. SCANNING DRIVE SYSTEM.............3-5

A. Driving the Scanner.......................3-5

IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......3-9

A. Scanner Drive Assembly ...............3-9

B. Lens Drive Assembly.....................3-18

This chapter discusses the principles of operation used for the copier’s lens drive unit and scanner

drive unit. It also explains the timing at which these drive units are operated, and shows how they may

be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. BASIC OPERATION

A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio

The reproduction ratio across the photosensitive drum is varied by the lens drive

system; on the other hand, the ratio around the drum is varied by the scanner drive

system.

The lens drive system uses a zoom lens; as shown in Figure 3-101, the position and

focal distance of the lens are changed to vary the reproduction ratio across the

photosensitive drum.

The scanner drive system varies the reproduction ratio around the photosensitive

drum by moving the No. 1 mirror relatively faster (reduction) or slower (enlargement) than

the peripheral speed of the photosensitive drum.

Figure 3-101

II. LENS DRIVE SYSTEM

A. Outline

The lens drive system is driven by the lens motor (M3). The drive of the lens motor

is transmitted to the blank exposure unit through a relay gear. (See p. 4-18.)

When the lens is moved, the solenoid (SL1) is turned on to engage the relay gear

with the lens gear; when the lens motor rotates in the direction of the arrow in this

condition, the lens is moved in the direction of enlargement (

←) by the work of the relay

lens gear and lens cable.

The blank exposure shutter, on the other hand, moves according to the distance

traveled by the lens for reduction, thereby blanking (whiting) out the areas on both ends

of the copy.

The copier’s scanner lens home position sensor (PS2) is located at the center of the

scanner lens drive rail so that the scanner lens home position may be detected early

upon power-on, thereby speeding up the generation of the first copy. In addition, the

scanning lens moves to the appropriate position in response to a press on each ratio

button, thereby shortening the time it takes to generate the first copy.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-1

F2'

F1'

Direct

Reduce

Enlarge

Figure 3-201

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-2

Change solenoid (SL1)

Lens motor (M3)

Lens cable

Lens motor (M3)

Change solenoid (SL1)

Relay gear

SL1 'ON'

(lens drive)

SL1 'OFF'

(blank exposure

unit drive)

Lens home

position sensor

(PS2)

Lens gear

Relay gear

Lens

Cam groove

Enlargement

Lens motor drive signal

Change solenoid drive signal (CHSLD*)

Lens home position

detection signal (LHP)

DC controller

B. Lens Motor Drive Circuit

The lens motor (M3) is a stepping motor and rotates in response to drive power

LNSC-A and LNSC-B and pulse signals LNSA, LNSA*, LNSB, and LNSB*.

1. Keeping the Lens Motor Stationary

All LNSA, LNSA*, LNSB, and LNSB* are caused to go OFF, thereby stopping and

retaining the motor stationary.

2. Driving the Lens Motor

Pulses are applied to each phase in sequence to rotate the motor.

Figure 3-202

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-3

LNSC-B

LNSC-A

LNSA

LNSA*

LNSB

LNSB*

J306

- 1

34V

- 4

- 5

- 6

- 2

- 3

DC controller PCB

Microprocessor

(Q301)

Lens motor

C. Basic Sequence of Operations (lens drive system; non-Direct)

When a specific reproduction ratio is selected, the lens always returns to the home

position before moving to the position appropriate to the selected ratio. This also holds

true when the reproduction ratio is reset to Direct.

Figure 3-203

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-4

INTR

Power switch

ON Copy Start key

STBY SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR

AER

∗

Scanner home position sensor

(PS1)

Registration sensor (PS6)

Scanner

Scanning lamp

Forward

Reverse

Half pre-heating Full pre-

heating Half pre-

heating

*Unless it is at the home position already, the scanner returns to the home position at power-on.

ON Pre-heating

III. SCANNING DRIVE SYSTEM

A. Driving the Scanner

1. Outline

The scanner drive system is driven by the scanner motor (M2). The scanner motor

changes the direction of its rotation between when the scanner moves forward and when

it moves in reverse; the speed of its rotation varies according to the selected

reproduction ratio. However, the speed of its rotation remains constant regardless of the

reproduction ratio when the scanner is moving in reverse; 2. 5 times as fast as when the

scanner is moving forward.

The distance traveled by the scanner varies according to the length of copy paper

and the selected reproduction ratio.

Figure 3-301

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-5

SC-COM A

SC-COM B

SC-A

SC-A*

SC-B

SC-B*

DC controller

PCB

No. 2 mirror mount

No. 1 mirror mount

Forward

PS1 light-blocking plate

Scanner home position detection signal (SCHP)

Scanner home position sensor (PS1)

2. Relationship between the Scanner Sensor and Signals

Table 3-301

Reference:

The registration clutch is turned on in response to a press on the Copy Start key or

when the scanner starts to move forward.

3. Basic Sequence of Operations (scanner)

Figure 3-302

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-6

Scanner sensor

PS1 (scanner

home position

sensor)

SCHP

Signal Scanner

Forward Reverse

Registration clutch turns on.

After 0.1 sec, the scanner stops moving

in reverse.

Description

LSTR

INTR

Power switch

ON Copy Start key

STBY SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV

AER

Scanner home position sensor

(PS1)

Registration sensor (PS6)

Scanner

Scanning lamp

Forward

Reverse

Half pre-heating Full pre-

heating Half pre-

heating

∗Unless it is at the home position already, the scanner returns to the home position at power-on.

ON Prehe-ating

∗

4. Driving the Scanner Motor

a. Outline

The scanner motor (M2) is a 4-phase control stepping motor. The direction and the

speed of the scanner motor (M2) are switched by controlling the output timing of drive

power SC-COMA and SC-COMB and pulse signals A, A*, B, and B*.

b. Mechanism

The microprocessor (Q301) on the DC controller PCB receives such instructions as

on copy mode and reproduction ratio from the control panel circuit; in response, it sends

drive pulses to the scanning motor (M2) through the motor drive circuit.

The scanner motor is a 4-phase control stepping motor, and is used to control the

sequence of drive pulses (SC-A through SC-B*) and frequency, thereby controlling the

direction of scans and speed.

The motor drive voltage ON/OFF switching circuit supplies or deprives the motor with

or of power, thereby controlling the motor drive.

The current switching control circuit sets the current that flows through the motor

according to the revolution, and the motor driver circuit controls the constant current

according to the value that has been set.

Figure 3-303

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-7

5. Scanner Operations in Page Separation Mode (non-AE, page separation, A4, 2

copies)

Figure 3-304

I, II, and III shown in Figure 3-108 are controlled by the microprocessor on the DC

controller PCB with reference to the scanner home position signal (falling edge of SCHP)

of the first original.

The microprocessor determines the distance to be traveled by the scanner according

to the size of the selected cassette.

I, II: The distance traveled by the scanner is determined by the reproduction ratio and

cassette size.

III: The copier does not have a mechanism that detects the size of originals; for this

reason, control for page separation is exerted with reference to the size of the

cassette.

If the distance traveled by the scanner forward (II in Figure 3-304) exceeds 216 mm

(approx.), the copier assumes a point corresponding to 216 mm to be the leading

edge of the second page.

The size of originals is checked only if an ADF (accessory) is installed.

The microprocessor identifies the result of dividing the identified size by 2 as the

center of the original and operates the scanner assuming that the center represents

the leading edge of the second original.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-8

IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to

disassemble/assemble the machine.

Be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling/assembling the machine:

1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.

2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to

disassemble them.

3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. A washer is used for one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against

static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.

5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure

correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.

6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.

7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front

door switch or the power switch.

A. Scanner Drive Assembly

1. Detaching the Scanner Drive Motor

1) Remove the upper rear cover.

2) Disconnect the connector

qof the motor, and remove the two screws w; then,

detach the scanner drive motor e.

Figure 3-401

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-9

2. Detaching the Scanner Cable

1) Detach the copyboard cover, right cover, left cover, upper rear cover, and lower rear

cover.

2) Detach the copyboard glass.

3) Detach the control panel.

4) Detach the copyboard cover support q.

Figure 3-402

5) Remove the six screws w, and detach the upper left stay e.

Figure 3-403

6) Fix the cable in place using a pully clip (FY9-3010)

Figure 3-404

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-10

7) Loosen the two screws rto loosen the cable tension (both front and right).

Figure 3-405

8) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the front to align the long hole in the front side plate

and the cable fixing screw t.

Then, detach the cable fixing screw tto separate the No. 1 mirror mount and the

scanner cable (both front and rear).

Figure 3-406

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-11

(front)

(rear)

9) Remove the pully clip, and detach the scanner cable (both front and rear).

3. Assembling the Mirror Position Tool

1) Remove the screw found in position B.

Figure 3-407

2) Fit the screw removed in step 1) in position A, and tighten it slightly.

3) Extend the arm accommodated by the main frame unit it butts against the stopper as

in Figure 3-408.

4) Tighten the screw.

Figure 3-408

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-12

Position B

Position A

4. Routing the Scanner Cable

Keep the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009) and pulley clip (FY9-3010) handy when

routing the scanner cable.

Further, if you are using the mirror positioning tool, assemble it in advance by

referring to “3. Assembling the MIrror Positioning Tool.”

Figure 3-409

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-13

1) Put the steel ball into the hole of the pulley, and wind the cable four times toward the

flange and then nine times in the opposite direction; thereafter, fix it in place using

the pulley clip.

2) As in w, set the mirror positioning tool between the No. 1 and No. 2 mirror mounts.

3) Loosen the screw on the mirror pulley mount as in e; then, temporarily fix the cable

in position on the left stay.

4) Route the cable as shown in the illustration; engage ton the hook on the side plate,

and engage the ion the tension plate on the lens mount.

5) Tighten the screw loosened in e, and fix the cable to the left stay.

6) Loosen the screws on the drive pulley once so that the tension of the scanner cable

is even as in !0; then, tighten it once again.

7) Fix the No. 1 mirror mount and the scanner cable fixing as in !1.

8) Make adjustments so that the length of the cable is 34 ±1 mm as in ousing a ruler.

Figure 3-410

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-14

Screw

Losen the screw,

and shift.

Re-tighten

the screw.

Set the mirror

positioning tool

Set screws

Loosen the set

screw to free the

totation of the

pulley.

Put the steel ball into

the hole in the

pulley, and wind the

cable nine times

toward the inside

and four times

toward the outside;

then, fit the pulley clip.

Pulley clip

Steel ball

34±1mm

Caution:

When attaching the wire spring, pay attention to the orientation of the spring; see

the diagrams below. If not attached correctly, its hook tip could interfere with the

cable.

Figure 3-411

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-15

Wirespring

Hook Hook

Cable

5. Adjusting the Position of the Mirrors (optical length of No. 1, 2, and 3 mirrors)

1) Keep the mirror positioning tool handy.

(See “3. Assembling the Mirror Positioning Tool.”)

2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount toward the front, and align the angular hole in the front

side plate and the cable fixing screw q.

Figure 3-412

3) Loosen the set screw on the pulley.

4) Set the mirror positioning tool wto the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mirror mount

(both front and rear).

Figure 3-413

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-16

(front) (rear)

(front)

Mirror positioning tool (front) Mirror positioning tool (rear)

5) Attach the scanner cable fixing to the No. 1 mirror mount using two screws e(both

front and rear).

6) Tighten the screw on the pulley.

7) Detach the tool (FY9-3009).

Figure 3-414

6. Cleaning the Scanner No. 6 Mirror

1) Open the front cover.

2) Open the copier by operating the copier open/close lever.

3) Detach the dust-proofing glass qand dust-proof mirror cover w.

Figure 3-415

4) Clean the No. 6 mirror using a blower brush or lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-17

(front) (rear)

B. Lens Drive Assembly

1. Detaching the Lens Drive Motor

1) Detach the upper rear cover and right glass rerainer.

2) Detach the copyboard glass.

3) Move the No. qmirror assembly 1 to the left.

4) Remove the two screws w, and detach the lens cover e.

Figure 3-416

5) Loosen the tension on the spring r, and detach the cable t.

Figure 3-417

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-18

6) Disconnect the two connectors yfrom the copier’s rear.

Figure 3-418

7) Remove the two screws u, and detach the lens drive unit i.

Figure 3-419

8) Remove the two screws, and disconnect the connector !0; then, detach the lens

motor !1.

Caution:

Disconnect the connector !0 first before removing the screw o; otherwise, the

harness and driver will come into contact with each other.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-19

Figure 3-420

2. Routing the Lens Cable

Figure 3-421 Lens Drive Assembly

1) Attach the lens cable to each pulley qwhile winding it around the lens pulley was

indicated in Figure 3-421.

2) Move the tension pulley eto hook the cable.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-20

o!0

Turn clockwise

three times.

3. Adjusting the Position of the Change Solenoid

Make adjustments by loosening the two screws tso that the gear ris moved fully

in the direction of b by the arm ewhen the steel core qof the solenoid is fully pushed

in the direction of B by a finger, i.e., when the E-ring wcomes into contact with the

solenoid.

Figure 3-422

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-21

44 2

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-22

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4

IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

I. PROCESSES .....................................4-1

A. Outline ...........................................4-1

B. Basic Sequence of Operations

(image formation system)..............4-3

C. Controlling the Scanning Lamp .....4-4

D. Controlling the Primary Charging

Roller Bias .....................................4-10

E. Controlling the Transfer Roller

Bias................................................4-13

F. Controlling the Static Eliminator

Bias................................................4-16

G. Controlling Blank Exposure...........4-18

H. Controlling the Primary Corona

Roller Cleaning Mechanism ..........4-20

I. Releasing the Transfer Roller........4-21

II. DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY AND

CLEANING ASSEMBLY .....................4-22

A. Outline ...........................................4-22

B. Controlling the Toner Level

Detection .......................................4-23

C. Controlling the Development

Bias................................................4-25

D. Automatic Control of Copy

Density...........................................4-27

III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......4-30

A. Illumination Assembly....................4-30

B. Drum Unit ......................................4-39

C. Primary Corona Assembly.............4-41

D. Transfer Charging Assembly .........4-44

E. Developing System........................4-47

This chapter discusses the principles of how images are formed. It also explains the timing at

which the various units involved in image formation are operated, and shows how they may be

disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. PROCESSES

A. Outline

Figure 4-101 shows the basic construction of the copier’s image formation system,

whose main functions are as follows:

• scanning lamp control

• primary charging control

• transfer charging control

• separation static eliminator control

• developing bias control

• blank exposure lamp control

Figure 4-101

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-1

----- -

Pre-exposure lamp

Scanning lamp

Blade

Cleaning blade

Transfer corona

assembly

Paper

Composite Power Supply PCB

DC controller PCB

Light area

Optical

image

+++++

Primary corona assembly

Dark

area

Developing

cylinder

Photosensitive

drum

Sttic eliminator

Blade

Scoop-up sheet

Figure 4-102

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-2

DC controller

PCB

Microprocessor

(Q301)

AE sensor

Scanning lamp

Copyboard glass

Lens

Blank exposure unit

Primary

charging

roller

Composite power

supply

Scanning lamp

ON control

circuit assembly

Microprocessor

(Q512)

High-voltage

circuit

assembly

T101

Static

eliminator

Developing cylinder

Transfer

roller

B. Basic Sequence of Operations (image formation system)

1 AE only.

2 half pre-heating control.

3 full pre-heating control.

4 ON pre-heating control.

Figure 4-103

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-3

Main motor/Pre-exposure lamp

Primary charging

Transfer charging

Transfer cleaning

Reference bias (ATVC)

Separation static eliminator

Developing bias AC component

Developing bias DC component

Scanning lamp

Power switch

ON Copy Start key

AER

STBY INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR

*2 *3

C. Controlling the Scanning Lamp

1. Outline

Figure 4-104 shows the circuit that controls the scanning lamp; the circuit has the

following functions:

• turns on and off the scanning lamp.

• controls scanning lamp pre-heating operation.

• controls scanning lamp intensity.

• controls the scanning lamp heater.

The copier’s scanning lamp is a fluorescent lamp.

In general, a fluorescent lamp is low in intensity immediately after power-on,

gradually increasing in intensity as time passes, without control; in particular, it takes a

long time before the intensity stabilizes in a low temperature environment.

If the ambient temperature drops below 15°C, the copier may enter and remain in

wait state before a specific intensity can be obtained. To prevent this from occurring, a

fluorescent lamp is provided for installation in low temperature environments.

To ensure that the lamp exposes an original at a stable intensity, a fluorescent lamp

adjusting sensor is used to monitor the intensity of the lamp during copying operation,

thereby controlling it to a specific value.

In addition, half pre-heating is executed between power-on and a press on the Copy

Start key so as to ensure that the lamp reaches its optimum intensity within a short

period of time after a press on the Copy Start key; thereafter, full pre-heating is

performed. (See Figure 4-105.)

Figure 4-104

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-4

(FL1)

J205 T401

Scanning lamp

Composite power

supply PCB

Fluorescent

lamp pre-

heating circuit

FLPRHT*

32KHzCLC

T101

T103

DC controller PCB

Micro-

processor

(Q301)

SW2

Fluorescent lamp

heater switch 5V

Fluorescent lamp

heater

Fluorescent lamp

thermistor

J701-1

(H2)

(TH3)

J202-1

-2

Fluores

cent lamp

intensity

sensor

-3

Main switch

Q108

FLTHON

FL ON

MPWM

FLS

Fluorescent

lamp drive

circuit

FLHTOFF*

FLTH

Micro-

processor

(Q512)

J211-3

J302-9

J211-9

FLTH J317-1

-2

-4

VR301

Reversal

amplifier

circuit

Fluorescent lamp

heater

control circuit

Main transformer

(T101) drive circuit

2. Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp

The microprocessor (Q301) on the DC controller PCB exerts control so that the

microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB generates the scanning

lamp ON signal (FLON)=0 (pulse signal, 1 kHz). At the time, the fluorescent lamp drive

circuit applies the output of the secondary side of the transformer (T101) to the scanning

lamp (FL1), thereby allowing current to flow through the scanning lamp and causing the

lamp to turn on at a high frequency (about 120 kHz).

3. Pre-Heating Control (scanning lamp)

The copier exerts four modes of control; namely, half pre-heating, full pre-heating,

ON pre-heating I, and ON pre-heating II.

These modes of control are executed by the microprocessor (Q301) on the DC

controller by varying the duty ratio of the fluorescent lamp pre-heat signal (FLPRHT;

pulse) of 5 kHz to suit each pre-heat control mode sent to each scanning lamp pre-heat

circuit. Based on the signal, the scanning lamp pre-heat circuit modulates the amplitude

of the signal (32 kHz); in response, the secondary side of the transformer (T401) turns

on to allow the fluorescent lamp pre-heat current to flow, thereby starting pre-heating

operation. (For the sequence of operations, see Figure 4-105.)

4. Sequence of Operations (scanning lamp pre-heating control; AE, A4,

continuous, 2 copies)

1 half pre-heating control.

2 full pre-heating control.

3 ON pre-heating I or II control.

Figure 4-105

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-5

STBY

Power switch

ON Copy Start key

AER

*1*3 *3

*1 *2

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

Scanner

Scanning lamp

Primary charging

1.5 sec

■Input Signals from the DC Controller to the Composite Power Supply PCB

*ON duty ratio of FLOW signal (in relation to 1kHz):

40% or more ................................ON I

less than 40% ..............................ON II

Table 4-101

■Half Pre-Heating Control (between press on Power switch and press on Copy Start

key; part of scanner reverse travel)

Figure 4-106

■Full Pre-Heating Control (initial rotation, last rotation, part of scanner reverse travel)

Figure 4-107

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-6

FLON signal

FLPRHT signal

OFF

5KHz

25.9%

Duty ratio (5 kHz)

Filament voltage

Half preheating

25.9 %

2.5Vrms

Full preheating

60 %

4.5Vrms

Fluorescent lamp

ON I*

44.4 %

3.6Vrms

Fluorescent lamp

ON II*

55 %

4.1Vrms

FLON signal

FLPRHT signal

OFF

5KHz

60%

■Scanning Lamp ON Pre-Heating Control (during copying operation I)

Figure 4-108

5. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp (FL1)

• If the intensity of the fluorescent lamp is too low at power-on,

The starting power of the intensity adjustment sensor lowers, and the fluorescent lamp

intensity adjustment signal (FLS) of the amplifier circuit on the DC controller increases.

In response to the signal, the microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply

PCB reduces the duty ratio, thereby increasing the ON time of the FLON signal.

The current flows through the filament of the fluorescent lamp when both the MPWM

signal (150 kHz) and the FLON signal (1 kHz) are on.

• If the intensity of the fluorescent lamp is too high at power-on,

The starting power of the intensity adjustment sensor rises, and the fluorescent lamp

intensity adjustment signal (FLS) of the amplifier circuit on the DC controller PCB

decreases. In response to the signal, the microprocessor (Q512) on the composite

PCB increases the duty ratio, thereby decreasing the ON time of the FLON signal.

Caution:

Gain Adjustment for the Intensity Adjustment Sensor (VR301)

If you replaced the intensity adjustment sensor or the scanning lamp (fluorescent

lamp, FL1), or the DC controller PCB, you must always perform gain adjustment for

the intensity adjustment sensor using VR301 on the DC controller PCB. (See the p.

10-10.)

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-7

FLON signal

FLPRHT signal

ON ON

5KHz

1KHz

44.4%

OFF OFF

40% or more

■Input to the Reversal Amplifier Circuit (if the intensity increased gradually)

Figure 4-109

■Changes in the Duty Ratio of the FLON signal

Figure 4-110

6. Controlling the Fluorescent Lamp Heater

As the temperature around the scanner increases, the resistance of the fluorescent

lamp thermistor (TH3) lowers, thereby lowering the voltage of the fluorescent lamp

thermal signal (FLTH). Based on the voltage, the fluorescent lamp heater control circuit

on the composite power supply PCB turns on and off the fluorescent lamp heater drive

signal (FLTHON).

You can force the fluorescent heater off by turning off the scanning lamp (fluorescent

lamp) heater switch (SW2) during the months in which the heater is not needed.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-8

Reference voltage

(4V)

Reference voltage

(4V)

Voltage (V)

Input from intensity

adjustment sensor

Lighter

Darker

Time (t)

"C" "D"

FLON signal 'C'

FLON signal 'D'

OFF

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-9

7. Fluorescent Lamp Automatic

Correction Control (ALVC control)

The copier executes control (ALVC control) that automatically corrects the scanning

lamp on voltage to make up for the change that otherwise could occur as a result of

deterioration of the photosensitive drum.

8. Fluorescent Lamp Protection Mechanism

If the fluorescent lamp fails or flickers continuously after copying is started, the

microprocessor on the DC controller increases the application voltage to turn on the

lamp properly.

This, however, imposes an excessive voltage to the fluorescent lamp, speeding up its

deterioration. To prevent such a problem, the DC controller turns off the power when an

error in the application voltage is detected on the composite power supply PCB.

Reference:

If the same problem occurs when the power is returned, the fluorescent lamp may

be faulty. Try replacing it.

Warning:

Do not execute operations that turn on the fluorescent lamp (coying, service mode)

without installing the fluorescend lamp.

D. Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias

1. Outline

Figure 4-111 shows the circuit that controls the voltage applied to the primary

charging roller; the circuit has the following functions:

• turns on and off the primary charging roller bias.

• controls the primary charging roller bias to a constant voltage.

• switches the application voltage level for the primary charging roller bias.

• corrects the scanning lamp on voltage level

The main transformer (T101) is driven by the drive signal (MPWM) generated by the

main transformer (T101).

The main transformer (T101), further, is used also as the high voltage transformer for

the DC power supply and others in addition to providing the above functions.

Figure 4-111

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-10

MPWM

PDCS

Composite power supply PCB

Main transformer

T101

Main transformer

(T101)

drive circuit

Rectifier circuit

Current

detection

circuit

Filter circuit

Voltage

detection

circuit

Micro-

processor

Q512

Q301 (Master)

Micro-

processor

PDC-PWM

PCS

Primary charging roller

Photosensitive drum

DC controller PCB

2. Turning On and Off the Primary Charging Roller Bias

The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB generates the

PDCPWN signal (pulse signal) under the control of the microprocessor master (Q301)

on the DC controller PCB. In response to the signal, the secondary side of the main

transformer (T101) turns on to apply a primary charging roller bias.

The main transformer (T101) is driven by the drive signal (MPWM) from the

microprocessor (Q512). The main transformer (T101) is also used as the high-voltage

transformer for the DC power supply and other loads.

3. Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias to a Constant Voltage

While a bias voltage is being applied to the primary charging roller, the

microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB reads the PDCS signal

(analog signal) from the voltage detection circuit to control the PDCPWM signal so that

the output voltage is maintained at a specific level.

4. Switching the Primary Charging Roller Bias Application Voltage Level

The copier applies a cleaning bias to the transfer roller during initial rotation (INT),

while the scanner is moving in reverse (SCRV), and during last rotation, thereby cleaning

the transfer charging roller. (See p. 4-21.)

To enhance the result of cleaning by the cleaning bias and to prevent drum memory

caused by the cleaning bias, a cleaning primary charging roller bias is applied during

initial rotation and while the scanner is moving in reverse.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-11

5. Application Voltage Level (APVC) for the Primary Charging Roller and

Scanning Lamp On Voltage Level Automatic Correction

Changes in the static latent image could cause the quality of copies; such changes,

in turn, may be attributed to the following factors:

• changes in the drum sensitivity

• changes in the charge volume of the primary charging roller.

These changes occur as a result of changes in the environment in which the copier

is installed (temperature, humidity), deterioration of parts, or wear and dirt on parts.

In the case of the copier, the light potential (VL) and dark potential (VD) tend to

increase, and the primary charging roller bias application voltage level is corrected

(APVC control) to compensate for possible problems while at the same time executing

scanning lamp on voltage level correction (ALVC control); specifically, the control serves

to ensure constant light potential (VL) and dark potential (VD).

See the following for the flow of operations that occur after the power is switched on

and during initial rotation:

• Flow

A constant voltage of about –1.46 kV is applied to the primary charging roller

for about 1.5 sec.

The current at the time is measured by the current detection circuit, and the

result is sent to the microprocessor (Q512).

The microprocessor (Q512), in turn, sends the result to the microprocessor

(Q301) on the DC controller, which determines the application voltage for

the primary charging roller bias based on the input.

Caution:

You must store the APVC value recorded on the label attached to the composite

power supply PCB in service mode whenever you have replaced the composite

power supply PCB. (See p. 10-102.)

Caution:

You must enter the APVC correction voltage setting recorded on the label attached

to the front of the drum unit whenever you have replaced the drum unit. (See p. 10-

102.)

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-12

E. Controlling the Transfer Roller Bias

1. Outline

The copier uses a direct transfer method by a roller to transfer images to paper. For

this reason, its bias control differs from that of conventional copiers, which transfer

images by corona charging.

The following three types of transfer roller bias are used; go through the

descriptions for the function and output timing of each.

a. Transfer Bias

This bias corresponds to the transfer bias of conventional copiers, and is a negative

voltage (constant voltage, –3.5 kV to –6.0 kVDC).

b. Cleaning Bias

Since the copier uses a direct transfer method, jams could cause toner on the

photosensitive drum to deposit itself on the transfer roller.

To remove such deposits of toner, the copier applies a positive voltage (constant

voltage, DC) at the following timing, thereby returning the toner from the transfer roller to

the photosensitive drum.

Cleaning Bias Output Timing

• during initial rotation after a press on the Copy Start key

• while the scanner is moving in reverse (certain period)

• during last rotation (certain period)

c. Reference Bias (ATVC)

Changes in the environment or deterioration of the transfer roller can affect the

resistance of the transfer roller, ultimately affecting the transfer efficiency.

To limit the changes in the image quality brought about by such changes in the

transfer efficiency, the copier corrects the application voltage level of the transfer bias.

The transfer ATVC bias (constant current, –10 µA DC) is the bias applied to

determine the correction value each time the Start button is pressed.

Figure 4-112

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-13

INTR

Copy Start key

Main motor (M1)

Transfer bias

Cleaning bias (+)

Reference bias (ATVC)

Static eliminator bias

SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STRT

Figure 4-113 shows the circuit used to control the foregoing three types of bias; the

circuit has the following functions:

• turns on and off the transfer roller bias

• controls the transfer bias to a constant voltage

• controls the correction of the transfer bias voltage level

Figure 4-113

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-14

DC power

supply

assembly

24V

Transfer

bias

control

circuit

Composite power supply PCB Photosensitive

drum

Transfer roller

Transformer

circuit

24V

T402

TFWON*

TFWPWM

TFWS

TREVON*

Constant

voltage control

circuit

Current

limiter circuit

(transfer bias)

Constant

current circuit

(ATVC)

Current

limiter circuit

(cleaning)

Cleaning bias

control circuit

Microprocessor (Q512)

DC controller PCB

Microprocessor (Q301)

2. Turning On and Off the Transfer Roller Bias

The TFWON signal is generated under the control of the microprocessor (Q512) on

the composite power supply PCB. The signal causes the secondary side of the transfer

transformer (T402) to turn on, thereby applying a DC bias to the transfer roller.

Table 4-102 shows combinations of signals that are used when determining the

transfer roller bias.

Table 4-102

3. Controlling the Transfer Bias to a Constant Voltage

While the transfer DC bias is being generated, the microprocessor (Q512) on the

composite power supply PCB reads the TFWS signal (analog signal) from the constant

voltage control circuit and changes the duty ratio so that the application voltage is

maintained at a constant level, thereby controlling the TFWPWM signal.

4. Controlling the Transfer Bias Voltage Level Correction (ATVC control)

To correct the changes in the transfer efficiency caused by changes in the

environment or deterioration of the transfer roller, the application voltage level of the

transfer bias is corrected automatically.

A constant current (–10 µA) is let to flow during initial rotation after a press on the

Copy Start key. The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB takes

in the transfer roller application voltage at the time from the constant voltage control

circuit, and sends the data to the microprocessor (Q512) on the DC controller; the DC

controller, in turn, determines the level of the voltage to be applied to the transfer roller

based on the data.

This control is executed only once during initial rotation immediately after a press on

the Copy Start button; for this reason, the application voltage will never vary during

continuous copying operation.

5. Current Limiter Circuit (transfer bias)

Should an overcurrent flow to the secondary side of the transformer (T402) while a

transfer bias is being generated because of changes in the environment, the current

limiter circuit exerts control so as to prevent any occurrence of a current which is 50 µA

or more.

6. Current Limiter Circuit (cleaning bias)

Should an overcurrent flow to the secondary side of the transformer (T402) while a

transfer bias is being generated, the current limiter circuit exerts control to prevent any

occurrence of a current which is 10 µA or more.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-15

Transfer bias output

Cleaning bias output

Reference bias output (A TVC)

TREVON*

OFF

TFWON*

OFF

TFWPWM

OFF

F. Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias

1. Outline

Figure 4-114 shows the circuit that controls the static eliminator bias; the circuit has

the following functions:

• turns on and off the static eliminator bias and controls the voltage to a constant

level

• switches the static eliminator bias voltage level

Figure 4-114

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-16

Composite power supply PCB

Main transformer

T101

JLVCTL JCTL

MPWM

Microprocessor

(Q512)

J211

11~15

J210

1~6

J302

J301

Microprocessor

(Q301)

Transformer

(T101)

drive circuit

Static eliminator

bias drive

circuit Transformer

circuit

DC controller PCB

Photosensitive drum

Static

eliminator

2. Switching the Static Eliminator Bias Voltage Level

The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB generates the

JCTL signal (analog signal) under the control of the DC controller PCB. In response, the

secondary side of the main transformer (T101) turns on to generate a bias for the static

eliminator with the help of the main transformer (T101).

The output of voltages (2.5 kV, 4.0 kV) is switched by the JLVCTL signal.

When the JCTL signal turns on, the drive circuit turns on to generate the static

eliminator bias.

3. Ensuring Proper Separation of Thin Paper

Under some environmental conditions, thin paper can fail to separate at times.

To ensure proper separation, the voltage applied to the static eliminator may be

permanently set to 4.0 kV.

To do this, use service mode No. 506 (separation static eliminator output voltage; see

p. 10-107).

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-17

G. Controlling Blank Exposure

1. Outline

The copier uses the reflecting plate to direct the light of the pre-exposure lamp to the

photosensitive drum by way of executing blank exposure, thereby blanking (whiting) out

the non-image areas and areas between copies.

The area of blank exposure is controlled by the two slide shutters and one open/close

shutter.

Figure 4-115

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-18

Lens motor M

Change solenoid (SL1)

Slide shutter (rear)

Reflectiong plate

for size blanking

Gear A

Gear B

Reflectiong plate

for full blanking

Blank shutter

solenoid

(SL3)

Pre-exposure lamp

Open/close shutter

Blanking shutter home

position sensor (PS3)

Slide shutter

(front)

DC controller PCB

Blank shutter solenoid drive signal

(BSSLD*)

Blank shutter home position

detection signal (BSHP)

Change solenoid drive signal (CHSLD*)

2. Blanking (Whiting) of Non-Image Areas for Reduction

In Reduce mode, the change solenoid (SL1) turns on, and the lens moves according

to the selected reproduction ratio. When the change solenoid (SL1) turns off, the drive of

the lens motor is transmitted to gears A and B, thereby moving the slide shutter (rear,

front) for the appropriate distance to open the exposure window. In this condition, the

light from the pre-exposure lamp is directed to the photosensitive drum by way of the

reflecting plate for size blanking.

Figure 4-116

3. Blanking (Whiting) Out the Leading/Trailing Edges and between Copies

The blank shutter solenoid drive signal (BSSSLD) turns on or off under the control of

the microprocessor (Q301) on the DC controller. The leading/trailing edge and the area

between copies are blacked (whited) out by opening the open/close shutter in this way.

Figure 4-117

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-19

Size blanking optical path

Full blanking optical path

Open/close shutter

Slide shutter

Pre-exposure optical path

Drum cartridge

Drum cleaning

assembly

Pre-exposure

reflecting plate

Reflecting plate

for size blanking

Reflecting plate

for full blanking

Image exposure

optical path

Photosensitive

drum

H. Controlling the Primary Corona Roller Cleaning Mechanism

1. Outline

The copier’s primary charging roller is equipped with an automatic cleaning

mechanism.

The automatic cleaning mechanism cleans the primary charging roller during initial

rotation(INTR) after having made 250 or more copies, i.e., after executing transfer roller

release control five times.

2. Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Operation

The primary charging roller cleaning solenoid (SL4) on signal (PCLSLD) is generated

under the control of the microprocessor (Q301) on the DC controller PCB. In response

to the signal, the cleaning pad is butted against the roller for 2 sec, during which time the

cleaning roller makes about 4 rotations.

Figure 4-118

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-20

Primary charging roller

cleaning solenoid Fulcrum Fulcrum Cleaning pad

Primary

charging

roller

Drum unit Drum

I. Releasing the Transfer Roller

1. Outline

The copier’s transfer roller is equipped with a releasing mechanism.

The releasing mechanism releases the transfer roller to prevent adhesion of toner to

the roller under the following condition:

• during post rotation (LSTR) after as many as 50 copies or more have been made

(cumulative)

Figure 4-119

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-21

Transfer roller

releasing solenoid

Photosensitive drum

Transfer roller

Fulcrum engaging

releasing

II. DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY AND CLEANING

ASSEMBLY

A. Outline

The copier’s photosensitive drum, developing cylinder, No. 1 stirring rod, and No. 2

stirring blade are rotated by the drive of the main motor (M1).

The level of the toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the toner

sensor; when it drops below a specific level, the Add Toner indicator flashes on the

display of the control panel.

The No. 1 stirring rod serves to supply toner to the developing cylinder and stir the

toner flow layer inside the developing chamber.

The No. 2 stirring blade is used to stir the toner inside the toner container and, at the

same time, to supply toner to the developing chamber.

The waste toner collected by the cleaning blade is forwarded by the waste toner feed

blade for collection inside the waste toner assembly.

Figure 4-201

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-22

Cleaning blade

Waste toner

feeding blade

Waste toner

assembly

Primary charging

roller

Drum cartridge

Photosensitive

drum

Toner sensor

Toner container

Developing

cylinder No. 1

stirring rod No. 2 stirring blade

Toner level

detection PCB

Torque limiter

Main motor/

Main motor

driver PCB

Motor drive signal

DC controller PCB

Toner out signal

(TEP*)

B. Controlling the Toner Level Detection

The level of toner inside the cartridge is monitored by the antenna sensor circuit.

The toner level sensor is found inside the cartridge, and an AC bias is applied to the

developing cylinder.

The developing cylinder and the toner level sensor are connected by means of static

electricity; the volumes of charges between the two vary according to the amount of

toner inside the cartridge; as a result, an AC bias that represents the level of the toner

is checked by the toner level sensor, and the data is sent to the antenna sensor circuit.

The antenna sensor circuit receives a reference signal from the composite power

supply circuit; the reference signal is an AC bias with a specific AC bias that has gone

through attenuation.

In the antenna circuit, the signal coming from the toner level sensor and the

reference signal are compared to find out the level of toner.

Figure 4-202

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-23

Toner

Blade

Developing cylinder

Blade mount Toner level

sensor Developing assembly

frame

Antenna sensor circuit

Comparator circuit

DC controller

PCB

TEP*

qWhen the Level of Toner Is Adequate

The presence of toner around the toner level sensor causes the AC bias generated

by the sensor to be larger than the reference signal.

The condition causes the output from the comparator circuit to go ‘1’ and the toner

out signal (TEP*) to go ‘0’.

wWhen the Level of toner Is Inadequate

The toner around the toner level sensor decreases in amount, causing the AC bias

generated by the sensor to lower.

Since the reference signal, on the other hand, remains unchanged, the output

voltage remains high.

The difference in the potential causes the output of the comparator circuit to go ‘0’,

causing the toner out signal (TEP*) to go ‘1’.

The condition causes the microprocessor (Q301) in the DC controller cirucit to make

checks only during copying operating (AC bias ON); if it detects the toner out signal=0,

each lasting 0.25 sec or more, for a total time equivalent of three copies, the Cartridge

indicator is flashed on the display of the control panel.

eTorque Limiter

If an excessive load is imposed on the photosensitive drum because of excessive

amounts of waste toner or some other reason while the drum is rotating, the torque

limiter cuts off the drive from the main motor to stop the rotating of the drum.

Figure 4-203

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-24

STBY

Copy Start key

Main motor (M1)

Toner level detection timing

Toner out signal (TEP*)

AC bias

Power switch

ON Cartridge indicator

flashing timing

A4, AE3 copies, continuous mode

Cartridge indicator (tlashing)

1st (3 sec) 2nd (1 sec) 3rd (0.5 sec)

Copy STBY Copy STBY Copy

C. Controlling the Development Bias

1. Outline

Figure 4-204 shows the circuit used to control the development bias; the circuit has

the following functions:

• turns on and off the AC component of the development bias

• turns on and off the DC component of the development bias

• controls the voltage level of the DC component of the development bias

• controls the DC component of the development bias to a constant level

2. Turning On and Off the DC Component of the Developing Bias and Controlling

the Voltage to a Constant Level

The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB generates the

BPWM signal (pulse signal) under the control of the microprocessor master (Q301) on

the DC controller PCB. In response, the secondary side of the main transformer (T101)

turns on to apply the DC component of the development bias.

In addition, while the DC component of the development bias is being applied, the

application voltage is taken in from the development DC bias voltage detection circuit in

the form of the BIASS signal (analog signal) to exert control so that the output voltage is

maintained at a constant level.

The main transformer (T101) is driven by the drive signal (MPWM) from the

microprocessor (Q512). In addition to the foregoing functions, the main transformer

(T101) is also used as the high-voltage transformer for the DC power supply and other

loads.

Figure 4-204

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-25

Composite power supply PCB

Main transformer

T101

Transformer (T101)

drive circuit

Development

DC bias drive

circuit

Development

DC bias voltage

detection circuit

Development AC bias

transformer

T301

BPWM

BIASS

MPWM

J211

1~15

J210

1~6

J302

J301

Development

AC transformer

drive circuit

Microprocessor

(Q512)

Photosensitive

drum

Developing cylinder

AE sensor

Copy Density key

DC controller PCB

Microprocessor

(Q301) Copy density

correction volume

(VR302)

ACBIAS

3. Turning On and Off the AC Component of the Development Bias

The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB generates the

ACBIAS signal (pulse signal) under the control of the microprocessor master (Q301) on

the DC controller PCB. In response to the signal, the development bias AC component

generating transformer (T301) turns on to add the AC component of the development

bias to the DC component for application.

• application frequency 2400 Hz (approx.)

• application voltage 1300 Vp-p (approx.)

4. Controlling the Voltage Level of the DC Component of the Development Bias

The copier modifies the voltage level of the DC component of the development bias

based on the following factors:

• setting of the Copy Density key

• output of the AE sensor

• position of the Copy Density Correction knob (VR302)

The copier controls so that the voltage of the DC component of the development bias

varies between –80 and –560 V (in actual terms) by varying the output of the BPWM

signal.

To ompensate increases in the

light

potential (VL) caused by deterioration of the

photosensitive drum, the copier is equipped with a copy density correction volume. You

may operate the volume (VR302) on the DC controller PCB to adjust the potential of the

DC bias for any increase in VL, thereby freeing the copies of fogging.

Figure 4-205

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-26

(to lighter) (to darker)

VR302

Developing bias

(DC component)

-500

-400

-100

Darker

Medium

Lighter

(darker) 5

Copy density

(lighter)

D. Automatic Control of Copy Density

1. Outline

The copier has an automatic density adjustment mechanism (AE), which

automatically controls the DC component of the development bias according to the

density of originals. As long as the original is more or less uniform in density, the AE

mechanism varies the DC component of the development bias accordingly to ensure

fogging-free copies.

The DC component controlled in AE mode is indicated in the copy density display of

the control panel.

2. Control Method

During initial rotation (INTR), the scanning lamp (FL1) is turned on at a specific

intensity and the scanner is moved forward about 65 mm to expose the original.

With the scanner in this position, the reflected light over the area shown in Figure 4-

207 is measured by the AE sensor (photodiode), and the measurements are sent to the

DC controller PCB.

In response, the DC controller PCB computes the optimum value of the development

DC bias for copying operation, and generates the result to the microprocessor on the

composite power supply. Figure 4-206 shows the changes in the DC component of the

development bias caused by the changes in the density of an original.

The graph is based on the amount of exposure that brings optimum density without

fogging when copies are made of a newspaper or a Test Sheet.

Figure 4-206

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-27

Developing DC bias

Copy density 9

(equivalent)

Copy density 7.5

(equivalent)

Copy density 5

(equivalent)

Test Sheet Density of original

Newspaper

Figure 4-207 (Area Read by the AE Sensor)

Reference:

When copies are made in AE using an ADF-E1 (accessory), the density is checked

for each original.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-28

27 mm

(approx.)

Center reference

50 mm (approx.)

14 mm

(approx.) 27 mm

(approx.)

Note: A indiates the position of the AE sensor

3. AE Adjustment

The copier’s AE adjustment is executed in service mode and consists of the following

three types:

• lamp intensity automatic adjustment (No. 301) during AE scans

• copy density (development bias) standard adjustment (No. 302) during AE mode

• copy density (development bias) slope adjustment (No. 303) during AE mode

Table 4-201

Item

No. 301

No. 302

No. 303

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-29

Description

Lamp intensity

automatic

adjustment dur-

ing AE scans

Copy density

(development

bias) standard

adjustment

during AE

mode

Copy density

(development

bias) slope

adjustment

during AE

mode

Adjustments Remarks

The density is adjusted auto-

matically so that the copy

density will be 5 when mak-

ing copies of the Test Chart.

qIf the setting is decreased

in service mode,

→AE copies will be

darker.

wIf the setting is increased

in service mode,

→AE copies will be

lighter.

default: 0

settings: -26 to +26

qIf the setting is increased

in service mode,

→copies of a newspaper

will be lighter.

wIf the setting is decreased

in service mode,

→copies of a newspaper

will be darker.

default: 0

settings: -26 to +26

Lighter

Copy

density

Density

Test Chart

Density of

Original

Lighert

Copy

density

Density

Test Chart

Density of

Original

Lighter

Copy

density

Density

Test Chart

Density of

Original

Newspaper

III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to

disassemble/assemble the machine.

Be sure to observe the following when disassembling/assembling the machine:

1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.

2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to

disassemble them.

3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. A washer is used for one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against

static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.

5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure

correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.

6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.

7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front

door switch or the power switch.

A. Illumination Assembly

1. Detaching the Scanning Lamp/Fluorescent Lamp Heater

1) Disconnect the power plug.

2) Detach the copyboard glass.

3) Detach the upper rear cover.

4) Move the scanner unit near the center.

5) Remove the two screws q, and detach the light-blocking plate w.

Figure 4-301

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-30

6) Disconnect the connectors e, r.

Figure 4-302

7) Remove the screw t, and disconnect the connector y.

8) Pull the fluorescent lamp uslowly toward the front to detach.

Figure 4-303

Caution:

Do not touch the fluorescent lamp. (Use lint-free paper.)

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-31

9) Detach the fluorescent lamp heater ifrom the fluorescent lamp.

Figure 4-304

2. Points to Note When Attaching the Fluorescent Lamp Heater/Scanning Lamp

• Attach the heater to the lamp as follows:

Figure 4-305

Caution:

Do not touch the fluorescent lamp. (Use lint-free paper.)

Do not block the light-emitting portion by the fluorescent lamp heater.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-32

Light-emitting

portion

Heater

1~5mm

60mm 60mm

Attach the scanning lamp so that its light-emitting portion (open side) is to the left

when viewed from the front of the copier as shown in Figure 4-306.

Figure 4-306 (front view)

Caution:

Do not touch the fluorescent lamp. (Use rint-free paper)

Be sure to adjust the gain and AE whenever you have replaced the fluorescent

lamp. (See p. 10-10.)

• Make sure that the cut-off of the fluorescent heater is correctly oriented in relation

to the intensity adjustment sensor.

Figure 4-307

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-33

Light-emitting

portion

Adjustment sensor

Fluorescent heater

Reference:

The fluorescent lamp heater will not operate unless the copier’s heater switch is

turned on.

3. Detaching the Blank Exposure Assembly

1) Open the front cover.

2) Pull the copier’s open/close lever to open the copier.

3) Detach the inside cover.

4) Detach the exhaust fan and Drum cartridge. (See “Detaching the Exhaust Fan”.)

5) Disconnect the connector q(J315) on the DC controller PCB, and remove the two

screws w.

Figure 4-308

6) Push up the blank exposure assembly elightly upward, and pull it out toward the

bottom front.

Figure 4-309

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-34

4. Detaching the Blank Exposure Lamp

1) Detach the blank exposure assembly. (See “3. Detaching the Blank Exposure

Assembly on p. 4-34.”)

2) Remove the four screws q, and disconnect the connector w.

Figure 4-310

3) Disconnect the connector e.

Figure 4-311

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-35

4) Remove the three screws r, and detach the blank exposure lamp t.

Figure 4-312

5. Detaching the Blank Shutter Solenoid

1) Detach the blank exposure assembly.

2) Detach the blank shutter upper plate, and disconnect the connector q. (See “3.

Detaching the Blank Exposure Assembly on p. 4-34.”)

3) Remove the E-ring w, and detach the link arm efrom the blank shutter.

4) Remove the two screws r, and pull out the blank shutter solenoid.

Figure 4-313

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-36

6. Positioning the Blank Shutter Solenoid

Adjust the position of the solenoid so that the bottom A is 7.7 ±0.5 mm on both sides

of the shutter when the solenoid is moved in the direction of activation. When taking

measurements, do not push down the shutter.

After adjustments, make sure that the solenoid moves smoothly.

Figure 4-314

Figure 4-314b

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-37

7. Routing the Blanking Cable

Figure 4-315

8. Positioning the Left/Right Margin

Turn the blanking shutter adjusting screw on the copier’s front side plate shown in

Figure 4-316 so that the standards are met.

qclockwise turn moves the margin to the front.

wcounterclockwise turn moves the margin to the rear.

ea full turn moves about 1 mm.

Figure 4-316

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-38

Put the spring on the outside.

Slide shutter (rear)

Wind 3.5 items

Slide shutter (front)

B. Drum Unit

1. Detaching the Drum Unit

1) Open the front door.

2) Pull out the developing assembly releasing lever qtoward the front, and turn it

clockwise.

Figure 4-317

3) Open the copier’s top unit.

4) Turn the knob wcounterclockwise to detach.

5) Pull out the drum unit etoward the front.

Figure 4-318

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-39

Caution:

Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum.

The photosensitive drum is highly susceptible to light, and exposure even to room

lighting can lead to white spots or black bands on the copies.

As a rule, do not turn on the copier with the drum unit removed; otherwise, the

registration roller and the transfer guide will interfere with each other, and rotation

of the registration roller during WMUP will damage the roller.

2. Cleaning

If the surface of the photosensitive drum has become soiled, clean it with a flannel

cloth coated with toner; do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.

Caution:

Do not dry-wipe or use solvent.

Do not use drum cleaning powder.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-40

C. Primary Corona Assembly

1. Detaching the Primary Corona Assembly

1) Detach the drum unit.

2) Slide the lock qof the top of the drum unit in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 4-319

3) Detach the primary corona assembly unit wtogether with the holder while rotating it

in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 4-320

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-41

2. Cleaning the Cleaning Pad and the Primary Corona Roller

1) Detach the primary corona unit.

2) Place the primary corona assembly as shown in the figure, and clean the cleaning

pad ewith a cotton wad ror folded lint-free paper.

Caution:

• Dry-wipe only. Do not use water, alcohol, or solvent.

• Be sure to use strokes in one direction only.

Figure 4-321

3) Clean the primary charging roller twith lint-free paper ywhile rotating it.

Caution:

• Dry-wipe only. Do not use water, alcohol, or solvent.

• Be sure to use strokes in one direction only.

Figure 4-322

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-42

3. Positioning the Solenoid for the Primary Charging Roller

Make adjustments by loosening the two screws used to fix the solenoid ein place

and moving the solenoid einto the direction of arrow B so that

rin Figure 4-323 is 4.0

±0.2 mm when the joint qis butted against point aof the solenoid support w.

Figure 4-323

Caution:

You must make the adjustment whenever you have replaced the solenoid.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-43

= 4.0 ± 0.2

D. Transfer Charging Assembly

1. Detaching the Transfer Roller

1) Open the front door.

2) Open the copier’s top body.

3) Detach the static eliminator.

4) Detach the bushing q, and lift the transfer roller wto detach.

Figure 4-324

Caution:

Do not touch the surface of the roller.

Do not soil the surface of the roller.

2. Attaching the Drum Heater

1) Detach the front cover.

2) Open the copier’s top body by operating the copier open/close lever.

3) Detach the inside cover.

4) Remove the three fixing screws w, and detach the harness cover q.

Figure 4-325

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-44

5) Detach the transfer roller and the static eliminator.

6) Detach the transfer guide.

7) While butting the two heaters against the transfer guide as shown in Figure 4-326, fix

them in place using two screws e; then, fix the harness using two harness bands r

(front, rear).

8) Fix the harness with two SK binders t(front, rear) in place, and insert it into the

transfer guide.

Figure 4-326

Caution:

When fixing the harness in place, make sure that the cap portions of the terminal

are alternated as shown in Figure 4-327; if bundled in parallel, the harness will

come into contact with the transfer roller.

Figure 4-327

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-45

9) Connect the connector yas shown in Figure 4-328.

Figure 4-328

Caution:

Make sure that the spring at the rear is securely in the groove when attaching the

transfer guide to the copier after attaching the drum heater.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-46

E. Developing System

1. Removing the Developing Assembly

1) Open the copier’s front door.

2) Operate the open/close lever to open the top body.

3) Turn the locking lever qclockwise to unlock the developing assembly.

4) Remove the screw w.

5) Pull the developing assembly eslowly to the front.

Figure 4-329

2. Removing the Blade Assembly

1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier.

2) Remove the four screws q, and remove the developing cover w.

Figure 4-330

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-47

3) Place a newspaper or the like on the floor or a desk top, and pour out the toner from

the developing assembly.

4) Remove the two screws e, and remove the blade assembly* r.

* consisting of the blade and its mount.

Figure 4-331

3. Removing the Developing Cylinder Side Seal

1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier.

2) Remove the blade assembly.

Caution:

The blade must be installed at high precision. Do not remove it in the field. If

necessary, remove it intact on its mounting plate.

3) Remove the screw q, and remove the front cover w.

Figure 4-332

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-48

4) Remove the three screws e, and remove the terminal r, roll case t, and roll y.

Figure 4-333

5) Remove the three E-rings u, and gear i, gear o, and gear !0.

Figure 4-334

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-49

6) Remove the screw !1, and remove the butting roll !2 and roll case !3.

Figure 4-335

7) Remove the developing cylinder !4.

Figure 4-336

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-50

8) Remove the side seal !5. (both sides)

Figure 4-337

Figure 4-338

4. Installing the Side Seal and the Blade Assembly

1) Clean the area where the side seal will be installed with alcohol.

2) Attach the side seal as indicated in Figure 4-339.

Figure 4-339

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-51

3) Check that the side seal and the container are in firm contact.

4) Push the developing blade unit attachment section all the way against the upper side

and secure it with the screw.

Figure 4-340

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4-52

*Some spacers are glued top and

bottom in reverse; however, regardless

of the spacer positions, attach the

unit by pushing it all the way against

the Upper side.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5

PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ............5-1

A. Outline ...........................................5-1

II. PICK-UP OPERATION (COPIER)......5-3

A. Outline ...........................................5-3

B. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/

feeding assembly; A4, 2 copies) ...5-4

III. PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE

FEEDING MODULE-A2......................5-5

A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-5

B. Sequence of Operations

(cassette 2; A4, 2 copies)..............5-6

IV. MULTIFEEDER...................................5-7

A. Outline ...........................................5-7

B. Identifying the Size of Paper on

the Multifeeder...............................5-8

C. Sequence of Operations

(multifeeder; A4, 2 copies) ............5-9

V. IDENTIFYING THE CASSETTE

SIZE....................................................5-10

VI. IDENTIFYING JAMS ..........................5-12

A. Pre-Registration Delay Jam...........5-12

B. Pre-Registration Timing Jam.........5-13

C. Pre-Registration Stationary Jam ...5-13

D. Separation Delay Jam ...................5-14

E. Separation Stationary Jam............5-14

F. Delivery Delay Jam........................5-15

G. Delivery Stationary Jam ................5-15

VII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......5-16

A. Pick-Up Assembly .........................5-16

B. Multifeeder Assembly ....................5-23

C. Registration Roller Assembly ........5-31

D. Feeding Assembly.........................5-34

E. Cassette Unit.................................5-36

This chapter explains the principles used from when copy paper is picked up to when a copy is

delivered in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of

operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Figure 5-101

A. Outline

The NP6218 uses center reference, in which copy paper is moved through the center

of the pick-up/feeding path for stable pick-up/feeding operation.

Pick-up operation may be the cassette 1 pick-up from the copier, cassette 2/3 pick-

up from the Cassette feeding Module-B2/A2 and multifeeder pick-up.

When making copies, copy paper picked up from the cassette 1/2/3 or multifeeder is

controlled by the registration roller so that the leading edge of the image on

photosensitive drum matches with the leading edge of the copy paper; the paper is then

sent to the copy tray through the transfer, separation, feeding, fixing, and delivery

assemblies.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-1

Registration

roller Multifeeder

pick-up

roller

Pick-up

roller

Vertical path roller

Pick-up clutch

PS5

PS1cu

PS3cu

PS4cu

PS2cu

PS4

PS6

PS7

PS8

Pick-up roller

Photosensitive

drum

Feeding belt

Fixing assembly

Delivery roller

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

Cassette 3

Accesorry

Table 5-101

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-2

Sensor No.

PS4

PS5

PS6

PS7

PS8

PS1CU

PS2CU

PS3CU

PS4CU

Name

Multifeeder paper sensor

Cassette paper sensor

Registration sensor

Separation sensor

Delivery sensor

Cassette 2 vertical path sensor (Accessory)

Cassette 2 paper sensor (Accessory)

Cassette 3 vertical path sensor (Accessory)

Cassette 3 paper sensor (Accessory)

II. PICK-UP OPERATION (COPIER)

A. Outline

When the pick-up clutch (CL2 or CL3) turns on while the main motor (M1) is rotating,

the pick-up roller rotates to move paper as far as the registration roller.

The copy paper is controlled so that its leading edge and the leading edge of the

image on the photosensitive drum match; then, it is moved through the transfer

assembly, feeding assembly, fixing assembly, and delivery assembly to reach the copy

tray.As many as three photointerrupters (PS6, PS7, PS8) are provided along the paper

path, turning on the Jam indicator on the control panel when jams are identified in terms

of whether paper has reached or has moved past the respective sensors within a specific

period of time.

The presence/absence of paper inside the cassette or the multifeeder is monitored

by separate photointerpreters (PS4, PS5); when the absence of paper is identified, the

Paper indicator is flashed on the control panel.

Figure 5-201

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-3

B. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/feeding assembly; A4, 2

copies)

Figure 5-202

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-4

III. PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE FEEDING

MODULE-A2

A. Pick-Up Operation

When the pick-up clutch (CL1cu, CL2cu) turns on while the cassette unit motor

(M1cu), the pick-up roller starts to rotate to pick up copy paper; the paper is then moved

to the registration roller by the vertical path roller. (The sequence that follows is the same

as when paper is picked up from the cassette in the copier.)

For pick-up operation from the cassette feeding unit, pick-up sensors (PS1cu,

PS3cu) are used to check the arrival of paper, thereby deciding when to turn off the pick-

up roller according to the size of paper.

Figure 5-301

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-5

M1cu

Cassett e 2

Cassett e 3

PS2cu

PS4cu

PS1cu

CL1cu

CL2cu

PS3cu

Pick-up roller

Casette 2 size detection

Casette 3 size detection

Pick-up roller

Vertical path roller

Pick-up clutch

Cassette drive PCB

Cassette 2 size detection signal

Cassette 3 size detection signal

Cassette 2 paper detection signal (C2PD*)

Cassette 3 paper detection signal (C3PD*)

Cassette 2 vertical path detection signal

(C2VPD)

Cassette 3 vertical path detection signal

(C3VPD)

Cassette 2 pick-up clutch drive signal (C2PUCLD*)

Cassette 3 pick-up clutch drive signal (C3PUCLD*)

Cassette feeding unit motor drive

signal (CMD)

DC controller PCB

Cassette

unit motor

Pick-up clutch

B. Sequence of Operations (cassette 2; A4, 2 copies)

Figure 5-302

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-6

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

Copy Start key

Cassette

feeding

unit

Copier

Cassette 2 pick-up clutch

(CL1cu)

Cassette 2 vertical path sensor

(PS1cu)

Cassette feeding unit motor

(M1cu)

Registration clutch (CL1)

Registration sensor (PS6)

Main motor (M1)

IV. MULTIFEEDER

A. Outline

The multifeeder is designed to pick up paper loaded on its tray and is capable of

continuous pick-up operation.

Paper on the tray is detected by the multifeeder sensor (PS5).

Paper loaded on the tray is butted against the pick-up roller by the paper guide plate;

the drive from the main motor (M1) is transmitted to the pick-up roller through a clutch to

rotate the pick-up roller.

By the work of the pick-up roller and the separation pad, a single sheet of copy paper

is forwarded to the registration roller.

The series of operations is executed for each pick-up operation.

Figure 5-401

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-7

PS5

PS6

Multifeeder pick-up

clutch

Multifeeder paper sensor

Paper sensor lever

Paper guide plate

Multifeeder tray

Paper guide plate cam

Photosensitive

drum Registration

roller

Multifeeder pick-up

solenoid

Registration roller

paper sensor

Separation pad

SL2

Spring

clutch

CL3

Main motor

B. Identifying the Size of Paper on the Multifeeder

The width of copy paper is identified by a variable resistor (VR1) which operates in

response to the location of the slide guide, which is adjusted by the user to suit the size

of paper.

The identified width of copy paper is used for blank exposure control.

The length of paper when the multifeeder is used is identified by the period of time

during which the registration sensor (PS6) remains on.

The data collected in such a way is used to control the length of blank exposure,

activation of the registration roller, and high voltage.

Reference:

The maximum length of paper is 432 mm (LDG size); paper longer than this will

lead to a jam.

Figure 5-402

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-8

Slide guide (Front) Multifeeder tray

Slide guide (rear)

DC controller PCB

Variable resistor (VR1)

Multifeeder paper

width detection

(MFPWD)

C. Sequence of Operations (multifeeder; A4, 2 copies)

Figure 5-403

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-9

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR

Copy Start key

Multifeeder pick-up solenoid

(SL2)

Multifeeder pick-up clutch

(CL3)

Pre-registration sensor (PS6)

Registration clutch (CL2)

Scanner motor (M2)

V. IDENTIFYING THE CASSETTE SIZE

When a cassette is set in the cassette holder, appropriate photointerrupters (Q651,

Q652, Q653, Q654) turn on or off.

The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB identifies the presence/absence of a

cassette based on the combinations of the photointerrupters which are either on or off

(Table 5-501); accordingly, the microprocessor controls where the scanner must be

reversed or when to execute blank exposure.

(unit: mm)

1: photointerrupter is blocking light.

0: photointerrupter is not blocking light.

*size may be stored; must be within the range specified in mm; for details, see p. 10-

43.

Table 5-501

(right)

(Left)

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-10

Arrangement

Cassette size

No cassette

B5R (182

×257)

A4 (297 ×220)

A3 (297 ×420)

Mini (STMTR) 5.5" ×8.5"

(148 ×216)

Legal 8.5" ×14"

(356 ×216)

Letter 11" ×8.5"

(279 ×216)

A4R (210 ×297)

Letter R 8.5" ×11"

(216 ×279)

A5R (149 ×218)

A5 (218 ×149)

Mini-R (STMT) 8.5" ×5.5"

(216 ×148)

B5 (257 ×182)

B4 (364 ×257)

Ledger 11" ×17"

(182 ×257)

(182 ~ 283 ×198 ~ 354)

Q651

Q652

Q653

Q654

To change the cassette size, you must not only move the guide plate (horizontal,

vertical) inside the cassette to suit the copy paper but also move the paper size lever

located toward the front of the cassette (Figure 5-501) to the left or right so that the arrow

points to the appropriate paper size.

Caution:

A discrepancy between the size set by the paper size lever and the size of copy

paper will result in jams or soiling because of the wrong copying sequence.

Advise the user to be sure to match the size set by the paper size lever and the size

of copy paper.

Reference:

Paper size configurations differ from area to area; however, you may still make sure

of a specific copy control sequence for the size of paper that does not fall under the

respective category—the size, nevertheless, will not be indicated on the display.

For instance, you may use LTR paper for a metric model. (The paper size lever, in

this case, will be set to LTR.) This arrangement causes the copier to execute the

copying sequence intended for LTR copies.

Figure 5-501

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-11

Guide plate (vertical)

Paper size lever

Guide plate (horizontal)

VI. IDENTIFYING JAMS

As many as six (3 in the cassette feeding unit) are used to monitor the movement of

copy paper:

• registration sensor (PS6)

• separation sensor (PS7)

• delivery sensor (PS8)

A jam is identified in terms of the presence/absence of paper at the respective

sensors at such times as stored in the microprocessor.

The copier has a mechanism to remember how many copies remain to be made after

a jam and the current copy mode; it still retains such information even when it is deprived

of power by opening of the front cover.

The microprocessor has the jam detection sequence that is described below and,

further, identifies the presence of paper as detected by a sensor at power-on.

When the copier identifies a jam, it immediately stops the ongoing copying operation

and cuts off the power to the fixing heater (H1); at the same time, it flashes the Jam

indicator on the control panel and flashes also any of the location indicator.

The activation of the jam detection mechanism will not increment the copy count for

the copy which has jammed.

A. Pre-Registration Delay Jam

Copy paper does not reach the registration sensor (PS6) within a specific period of

time after the pick-up clutch (CL2) has gone on because of feeding problems.

Figure 5-601 Pre-Registration Delay Jam Sequence

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-12

Main motor (M1)

Jam check

STBY INTR SCRV SCFWSCFW

Pck-up clutch (CL2)

Registration sensor (PS6)

1.5 sec

Error

Copy Start key

ON Jam indicator

(flashing)

Normal

1.5 sec

B. Pre-Registration Timing Jam

Copy paper reaches the registration sensor (PS6) before a specific period of time

after the pick-up clutch (CL2) has gone on because of feeding problems.

Figure 5-602 Pre-Registration Timing Jam Sequence

C. Pre-Registration Stationary Jam

Copy paper does not move past the registration sensor (PS6) within a specific period

of time after the pick-up clutch (CL2) has turned on because of feeding problems.

Figure 5-603 Pre-Registration Stationary Jam Sequence

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-13

Main motor (M1)

Jam check

STBY INTR SCRV SCFWSCFW

Pck-up clutch (CL2)

Registration sensor (PS6)

0.8 sec

Copy Start key

ON Jam indicator

(flashing)

Normal Error

0.8 sec

Main motor

Jam check

STBY INTR SCRV SCRVSCFWSCFW

Pck-up clutch (CL2)

Registration sensor (PS6)

0.8 sec

Copy Start key

ON Jam indicator

(flashing)

Error

0.8 sec

Normal

0.8 sec

Normal

D. Separation Delay Jam

Copy paper does not reach the separation sensor (PS7) within a specific period of

time after the registration clutch (CL1) has gone on because of feeding problems.

Figure 5-604 Separation Delay Jam Sequence

E. Separation Stationary Jam

Copy paper does not move past the separation sensor (PS7) within a specific period

of time after the registration clutch (CL1) has gone on because of feeding problems.

Figure 5-605 Separation Stationary Jam Sequence

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-14

Main motor (M1)

Jam check

SCRV SCRVSCFWSCFW

Registration clutch (CL1)

Separation sensor (PS7)

Jam indicator

(flashing)

Normal

1.1 sec

Error

1.1 sec

Main motor (M1)

Jam check

SCRV SCRVSCFWSCFW

Registration clutch (CL1)

Separation sensor (PS7)

Jam indicator

(flashing)

Normal

0.3 sec

Error

0.3 sec

F. Delivery Delay Jam

Copy paper does not reach the delivery sensor (PS8) within a specific period of time

after it has moved past the separation sensor (PS7) because of feeding problems.

Figure 5-606 Delivery Delay Jam Sequence

G. Delivery Stationary Jam

Copy paper does not move past the delivery sensor within a specific period of time

after the delivery sensor (PS8) has gone on because of feeding problems.

Figure 5-607 Delivery Stationary Jam Sequence

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-15

Jam check

SCRV LSTRSCFW

Delivery sensor (PS8)

Normal Error

Main motor (M1)

Jam indicator

*1*1

Main motor (M1)

Jam check

SCRV SCRV LSTRSCFWSCFW

Separation sensor (PS7)

Delivery sensor (PS8)

Jam indicator

(flashing)

2.5 sec

Normal

2.5 sec

Error

Main motor (M1)

Jam check

SCRV SCRV LSTRSCFWSCFW

Separation sensor (PS7)

Delivery sensor (PS8)

Jam indicator

(flashing)

2.5 sec

Normal

2.5 sec

Error

VII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to

disassemble/assemble the machine.

Be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling/assembling the machine:

1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.

2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to

disassemble them.

3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. A washer is used for one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against

static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.

5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure

correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.

6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.

7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front

door switch or the power switch.

A. Pick-Up Assembly

1. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller Unit

1) Pull out the cassette.

2) Remove the stop ring

q(plastic) from the front of the pick-up roller unit.

Figure 5-701

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-16

3) Open the lower right cover.

4) Remove the two screws w, and pull out the paper guide plate toward the front.

Figure 5-702

Note:

You will have sufficient access to the pick-up roller and the bushing at the rear in

this condition.

5) Push in the pick-up roller efrom the direction of step 4) toward the rear, and remove

the bushing rwhile lowering it to the lower left.

Figure 5-703

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-17

Figure 5-704

6) Push in the bushing tat the rear toward the front, and lower the spring pressure to

remove the pick-up unit toward the left of the copier.

Figure 5-705

Note:

When removing the pick-up roller Assembly, separate the right side black bushing

from the key.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-18

Figure 5-706

Caution:

Check that the paper registration sensor (PS 6) is properly seated after this

procedure is completed.

2. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller

1) Detach the pick-up roller unit. (See “1. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller Unit” on p. 5-

14.)

2) Remove the E-ring qand the E-ring w; then, pull out the pick-up roller etogether

with the collar.

Caution:

Take care not to drop the pin found toward the rear.

Figure 5-707

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-19

3. Points to Note When Attaching the Pick-Up Roller

When attaching the pick-up roller q, attach it so that the side wshown in Figure 5-

708 is toward the rear.

Figure 5-708

4. Detaching the Pick-Up Clutch

1) Detach the main motor unit. (See “1. Detaching the Main Motor Unit” on p. 7-11.)

2) Remove the two screws q, and detach the connector mount w.

Figure 5-709

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-20

3) Disconnect the connector e, and remove the clip ring r; then, detach the pick-up

clutch t.

Figure 5-710

5. Detaching the Separation Pad

1) Open the right door.

2) Remove the two screws q, and detach the separation cover w.

Figure 5-711

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-21

3) Remove the two screws e, and detach the separation pad unit r.

Figure 5-712

6. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration

Make adjustments so that the position of the image is as shown in Figure 5-714 when

the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.

a. Pick-Up from the Cassette

Turn the screw qshown in Figure 5-713 to adjust the position of the cassette hook

plate.

standard: 0 ±1.5 mm

clockwise turn: moves the paper in the direction of – shown in Figure 5-714

counterclockwise turn: moves the paper in the direction of + shown in Figure 5-714

Figure 5-713 Figure 5-714

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-22

(-) (+)

0±1.5mm

B. Multifeeder Assembly

1. Detaching the Multifeeder Assembly

1) Open the right door.

2) Remove the two screws q, and shift the multifeeder assembly wtoward the front to

detach.

Figure 5-715

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-23

2. Detaching the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller Unit

1) Open the right door.

2) Remove the E-ring q, and pull out the bushing w.

3) Remove the two screws e.

Figure 5-716

4) Remove the screw r, and detach the roller cover t.

Figure 5-717

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-24

5) Shift the multifeeder pick-up roller unit ytoward the rear to detach.

Figure 5-718

3. Detaching the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller

1) Detach the multifeeder pick-up roller unit. (See “2. Detaching the Multifeeder Pick-Up

Roller Unit on p. 5-22.”)

2) Remove the stop ring q(plastic), and pull out the pick-up roller wtogether with the

collar.

Caution:

Take care not to drop the pin found at the rear.

Figure 5-719

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-25

4. Points to Keep Note When Attaching the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller

When attaching the multifeeder pick-up roller q, make sure that the side with a cross

won the collar is toward the rear.

Figure 5-720

5. Detaching the Separation Pad

1) Open the upper right door.

2) Remove the two screws q, and detach the separation pad w.

Caution:

At this time, take care not to lose the spring on the separation pad assembly.

Figure 5-721

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-26

(front of copier)

6. Detaching the Multifeeder Drive Unit

1) Detach the multifeeder assembly. (See “1. Detaching the Multifeeder Assembly on p.

5-21.”)

2) Detach the connector mount.

3) Remove the screw q.

Figure 5-722

4) Remove the screw w, and disconnect the connector e; then, detach the multifeeder

drive unit r.

Figure 5-723

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-27

7. Detaching the Multifeeder Clutch

1) Detach the multifeeder drive unit. (See “6. Multifeeder drive Unit on p. 5-25.”)

2) Remove the E-rings qwand screws ert; then, detach the support mount.

3) Detach the multifeeder pick-up clutch y.

Figure 5-724

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-28

8. Positioning the Multifeeder Assembly (paper guide plate cam)

Temporarily fix the screw equipped with a hex nut on the spring clutch assembly, and

rotate the control ring. Make adjustments so that the hole in the cam and the hole in the

multifeeder drive unit match as shown in Figure 5-725 when the claw is engaged with the

solenoid plate; then, fix in position.

Figure 5-725

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-29

9. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration

If the right/left registration is not correct when copies are made using the multifeeder,

loosen the screw q, and adjust the position of the tray.

Figure 5-726

10.Points to Note When Attaching the Multifeeder Assembly Rack Plate

Attach the rack plate of the multifeeder to the pulley while both its right and left are

fully open.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-30

C. Registration Roller Assembly

1. Detaching the Registration Clutch

1) Detach the connector cover or the lattice connector

2) Remove the clip ring q, and disconnect the connector w; then, detach the

registration clutch e.

Figure 5-727

2. Detaching the Upper Registration Roller

1) Detach the registration clutch. (See “1. Detaching the Registration Clutch on p. 5-

29.”)

2) Remove the spring q(front) and spring w(rear).

Figure 5-728

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-31

Figure 5-729

Caution:

Take care not to misplace the springs (front, rear).

3) Lift the upper registration roller eto detach.

Figure 5-730

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-32

3. Detaching the Lower Registration Roller

1) Detach the upper registration roller. (See “2. Detaching the Upper Registration Roller

on p. 5-29.”)

2) Open the lower right door, and remove the two screws qto shift the pick-up guide

wtoward the right side of the copier.

Figure 5-731

3) Remove the E-ring e(front), and shift the bushing r.

4) Detach the registration roller t.

Figure 5-732

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-33

D. Feeding Assembly

Be sure to detach the cartridge before detaching the feeding assembly.

1. Detaching the Feeding Belt

1) Detach the lower fixing unit. (See “8. Detaching the Lower Fixing Unit” on p. 6-23.)

2) Remove the three screws q, and shift the feeding retention plate w.

Figure 5-733

3) Disconnect the connector e, and shift the feeding retention plate w.

Figure 5-734

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-34

4) Detach the feeding spacer rby pulling it toward the fixing assembly.

Figure 5-735

5) Detach the static eliminator.

6) Detach the feeding spacer tfrom the hook (arrow).

Figure 5-736

Caution:

Take care not to touch the transfer roller. Do not damage the area where the

feeding spacers are in contact.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-35

E. Cassette Feeding Module

1. Detaching the Copier from the Cassette Feeding Module

1) Disconnect the copier’s power plug.

2) Disconnect the connector qof the cassette feeding module.

Figure 5-737

3) Hold the copier’s grips, and detach the copier from the cassette feeding module.

2. Detaching/Attaching the Pick-Up Roller

See p. 5-14 “1. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller Unit”, p. 5-17 “2. Detaching the Pick-Up

Roller” and p. 5-18 “3. Points to Note When Attaching the Pick-Up Roller.”

3. Detaching the Pick-Up Clutch

1) Detach the pick-up drive unit. (See p. 7-14 “1. Detaching the Pick-Up Drive Unit.”)

2) Detach the cassette motor. (See p. 7-15 “2. Detaching the Cassette Motor.”)

3) Remove the three screws q, and detach the bushing wand side plate e; then,

detach the pick-up clutch r.

Figure 5-738

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5-36

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6

FIXING SYSTEM

I. BASIC OPERATIONS.........................6-1

A. Outline ...........................................6-1

B. Controlling the Fixing Heater

Temperature ..................................6-3

C. Controlling the Supply Power for

the Fixing Heater...........................6-5

D. Detecting Overheating at the End

of the Fixing Heater.......................6-6

E. Protection Mechanism...................6-6

F. Correcting Displacement of the

Fixing Film .....................................6-7

II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......6-11

A. Fixing Assembly ............................6-11

B. Delivery Assembly.........................6-27

This chapter explains the principles used to fuse toner images to transfer medium in view of the

functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows

how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-1

I. BASIC OPERATIONS

A. Outline

The drive roller of the fixing assembly is driven by the main motor (M1).

When the drive roller rotates, the fixing film rotates and, in conjunction, the pressure

roller rotates.

Part of the inside of the fixing film is heated by the fixing heater.

The temperature of the fixing heater is monitored by a thermistor (TH1), and the

result is sent to the microprocessor in the DC controller circuit in the form of the fixing

heater temperature detection signal (TH1).

Based on the result (TH1 signal), the microprocessor on the DC controller varies the

fixing heater drive signal (HTRD) to control the temperature of the fixing heater.

Further, a thermistor (TH2) is also provided on the end (rear) of the fixing heater to

monitor overheating.

Figure 6-101

Drive roller

Delivery roller

Fixing cleaning roller

Pressure roller

Fixing heater

Fixing film

Tension roller

Main motor

Thermistor

Figure 6-102

PWSW*

Relay

(RL101)

+5V Composite power supply PCB

Thermal fuse

FU1

Fixing heater

end temperature

detection

TH2 TH2

TH1

Fixing heater

temperature

etection

Heater ON

detection PCB

Fixing heater

overheating

detection circuit

Fixing heater

end overheating

detection circuit

HTNG

Micro-

processor

HTRD

HTON*

DC controller PCB

Fixing heater driver PCB

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-2

B. Controlling the Fixing Heater Temperature

The fixing heater remains off while the copier is in standby state. To prevent fixing

faults caused by low temperature, its temperature is controlled in any of the following

three modes depending on the temperature at the time copying is started (as measured

by the main thermistor TH1) and the number of copies to be made in continuous mode:

a. If the temperature at the time copying is started is 140°C or more, it is controlled so

that it remains 180°C at all times.

• 1st to 100th copy

→180°C

b. If the temperature at the time copying is started is 120°C or more and less than

140°C, it is controlled so that it remains between 200° and 180°C depending on the

number of copies to be made.

• 1st copy →200°C

• 2nd to 9th copy →195°C

• 10th to 20th copy →190°C

• 21st to 25th copy →185°C

• 26th to 100th copy →180°C

c. If the temperature at the time copying is started is less than 120°C or less, the

temperature is controlled to 225°-180°C, 215°-180°C, or 200°-180°C selected by

service mode. (See the Service Handbook.)

■Control 1

• 1st to 4th copy →225°C

• 5th copy →220°C

• 6th copy →215°C

• 7th copy →210°C

• 8th copy →205°C

• 9th to 20th copy →200°C

• 21st to 25th copy →195°C

• 26th to 40th copy →190°C

• 41st to 45th copy →185°C

• 46th to 100th copy →180°C

■Control 2 (default)

• 1st to 4th copy →215°C

• 5th copy →210°C

• 6th copy →205°C

• 7th to 20th copy →200°C

• 21st to 25th copy →195°C

• 26th to 40th copy →190°C

• 41st to 45th copy →185°C

• 46th to 100th copy →180°C

■Control 3

• 1st to 20th copy →200°C

• 21st to 25th copy →195°C

• 26th to 40th copy →190°C

• 41st to 45th copy →185°C

• 46th to 100th copy →180°C

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-3

Reference:

Normally, control 2 is used. Use control 1 to increase the control temperature if a

fixing fault occurs; or use control 3 to lower the control temperature if offset occurs.

(See the p. 10-32.)

Figure 6-103

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-4

C. Controlling the Supply Power for the Fixing Heater

The temperature of the fixing heater is controlled by controlling the power supplied

to the fixing heater.

The resistance of the plane-shaped heater used as the fixing heater may show some

variation depending on which production lot it comes from.

For this reason, whenever you have replaced the copier’s heater, you must store the

resistance value in service mode (No. 304; see p. 10-31); this way, the microprocessor

on the DC controller PCB can exert proper control over power.

Caution:

The resistance of the fixing heater is stored in service mode at the time the copier

is shipped out of the factory; do not change it unless you have replaced the fixing

heater.

The power of the fixing heater is controlled by a phase power control method.

The microprocessor controls the output timing of the fixing heater drive signal

(HTRD) so that power that suits the target temperature of the fixing heater may be

supplied to the heater (potential control of the supply power).

Figure 6-104

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-5

HTRD

Supply power

to heater

D. Detecting Overheating at the End of the Fixing Heater

A sub thermistor (TH2) is provided at the end (rear) of the copier’s fixing heater to

monitor overheating.

This consideration to prevent damage to the fixing film caused by overheating of the

area where paper (smaller than B4) does not come into contact.

When TH2 registers 250°C or more, the distance between copies is increased to

facilitate discharge of heat by the fixing heater, thereby preventing overheating.

The copier continues to make copies maintaining such a distance even after TH2

registers a value lower than 250°C.

If the temperature further increases after the distance has been increased and if the

value reaches 260°C or more, the ongoing copying operation will be stopped and the

power will be cut off; at the times E001 information is stored. (See p. 10-109.)

E. Protection Mechanism

The copier is equipped with the following protective functions to prevent malfunction

of the fixing heater:

1. Thermistor (TH1, TH2)

1) The microprocessor on the DC controller monitors the voltage of the thermistor (TH1,

TH2); if it detects a high or low temperature error, it stops the power to the heater and

cuts off all the power. At the time, E000 thorugh E003 information is stored. (See p.

10-109.)

2) If the overheating detection circuit identifies that TH1 has registered 260°C or TH2

has registered 270°C for 0.3 sec or more, the heater error detection signal (HTNG)

turns off the relay (RL101) to stop power to the fixing heater and cut off all the power.

(See p. 10-109.)

Caution:

Be sure to disconnect the connector (J4) of the fixing heater and press the service

switch (SW301) on the DC controller when turning on the power.

2. Thermal Fuse (FU1)

If the temperature around the thermal fuse remains 226°C or more for a specific

period of time, the fuse melts to cut off the power to the fixing heater.

3. Heater ON Detection Circuit

The period of time during which the fixing heater drive signal (HTRD) remains off is

detected; if an error is found, the power is cut off and E004 information is stored at the

time.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-6

F. Correcting Displacement of the Fixing Film

1. Outline

The fixing film at times becomes displaced toward the front or rear as it keeps

turning. To correct such displacement, the copier is equipped with a correction

mechanism.

The control is executed by the fixing film sensor (PS9), which detects the position of

the film, and the fixing film motor (M4), which physically corrects displacement.

Reference:

If you turn on the power by inserting the door switch actuator into the door switch

with the top body of the copier open, E007 will be detected, since the condition

prevents the fixing film from turning.

Figure 6-105

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-7

Fixing film posision signal (FFD)

Main motor drive command (MMD)

Fuser film motor drive command (FMD)

DC controller PCB

Main motor

driver PCB

Tension roller

Fixing film

Fixing film motor

Main motor

Fixing film sensor

Delivery

Driver roller

Fixing heater

Pressure roller

(front)

The fixing film sensor (PS9) is used to detect the position of the fixing film and found

at the end of the film.

The rear (sensor side) of the fixing film is provided with a cut as shown in Figure 6-

106 so that the fixing film sensor continuously goes on and off.

Normally, the on and off periods of the sensor are identical as long as the fixing film

remains centered.

If the film starts to become displaced toward the rear, however, the on period

becomes longer; the off period becomes longer if the film starts to be displaced toward

the front. (See Figure 6-107)

The DC controller monitors the on and off periods of the sensor and computes the

difference to correct the position of the fixing film.

Figure 6-106

Figure 6-107

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-8

(unit: mm) 5

142

Fixing film

(rear)

(front)

Tension roller

Drive roller

OFF

Normal

(rear)

(front)

OFF

Displacement of the fixing film is physically corrected by the fixing film motor (M4).

When it identifies displacement of the fixing film, the DC controller rotates the fixing

film motor to move the rear of the tension roller up and down, thereby moving the fixing

film to the center to correct the displacement.

When the fixing film becomes displaced toward the rear, the tension roller is moved

down to move the fixing film toward the front.

When the fixing film becomes displaced toward the front, on the other hand, the

tension roller is moved up to move the fixing film toward the rear.

The fixing film is positioned properly by repeating these operations as necessary. If

the film has become displaced so much that the mechanism fails to make adequate

correction, ‘E007’ is indicated on the display. (See p. 10-110.)

Figure 6-108

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-9

Fixing belt motor (M4)

Tension roller

(rear view)

displacement to the rear

displacement to the front

2. Controlling the Fixing Film Motor

The fixing film motor is a stepping motor, and is rotated by the drive signal FMD and

pulse signals FFA, FFA*, FFB, and FFB*.

When FMD is ‘1’, the drive voltage FFCA and FFBC are imposed; the motor starts

to rotate when pulses are applied to each phase in specific sequence.

The motor is rotated in reverse by applying these pulses in reverse order.

Figure 6-109

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-10

Microprocessor

(Q314)

FMD

FFA

FFA*

FFB

FFB*

DC controller PCB

+24V

FFCA FFCB

II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to

disassemble/assemble the machine.

Be sure to observe the following whenever disassemblig/assembling the machine:

1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.

2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to

disassemble them.

3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. A washer is used for one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against

static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.

5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure

correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.

6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.

7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front

door switch or the power switch.

A. Fixing Assembly

1. Construction1

qDrive roller tFixing cleaning roller

wCleaning brush yLower fixing roller

eFixing film uFixing heater

rTension rollerFigure 6-201

Caution:

The fixing film is made of special material; do not touch it or soil it.

If you must replace the upper fixing unit, replace it on a unit basis in the field and

leave component replacement to the workshop.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-11

qwer

uyt

2. Detaching the Upper Fixing Unit

1) Open the copier’s front cover.

2) Open the copier’s top body.

3) Remove the two screws q, and detach the fixing assembly cover w.

Figure 6-202

4) Disconnect the four connectors e, and remove the screw r.

Figure 6-203

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-12

5) Open the fixing shutter t, and put the screw removed in step 4) into the hole yin

the front side plate.

Figure 6-204

6) Pull out the upper fixing unit toward the rear.

Caution:

Do not touch the fixing film.

3. Detaching the Fixing Film, Tension Roller, Drive Roller, Fixing Cleaning Brush,

and Fixing Heater Unit

Caution:

Before going through the steps, make sure that the heater and the heater connector

have cooled sufficiently.

1) Detach the upper fixing unit. (See “2. Detaching the Upper Fixing Unit on p. 6-12.”)

2) Remove the screw q, and detach the heater connector w(front).

Caution:

If you are removing the screw q, you must first make sure that the heater connector

has cooled.

The screw qis a special screw; take care not to drop it.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-13

Figure 6-205

3) Remove the two E-rings eand the two washers r.

4) Remove the screw t.

Figure 6-206

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-14

5) Release the pressure by positioning the screw tas shown in Figure 6-207.

6) Remove the screw y, and detach the bushing u.

Figure 6-207

7) Remove the screw i, and detach the bushing o; then, detach the upper fixing top

side plate !0.

Figure 6-208

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-15

8) Release the pressure by positioning the screw yand the bushing (rear) as shown in

Figure 6-209.

Figure 6-209

9) Pull out the fixing film !2 toward the front.

10) Detach the tension roller !3.

Figure 6-210

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-16

11) Remove the screw !4, and detach the fixing film sensor !5.

Figure 6-211

12) Remove the E-ring !6.

Figure 6-212

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-17

13) Remove the washer !7 and the bushing !8, and detach the drive roller !9.

Figure 6-213

14) Life the delivery side, and detach the fixing cleaning brush @0.

Figure 6-214

15) Remove the two screws @1, and detach the cover @2.

Figure 6-215

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-18

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-19

16) Remove the two screws @3, and detach the fixing film motor unit @4.

Figure 6-216

17) Remove the screw @5, and detach the cover @6.

18) Remove the screw @7, and disconnect the heater connector @8.

Caution:

If you are removing the screw @7, you must first make sure that the heater connector

has cooled.

The screw @7 is a special screw; take care not to lose it.

19) Remove the C-ring @9, and detach the bushing #0, leaving the fixing heater behind.

Figure 6-217

Caution:

Do not touch the surface of the heater.

@9 #0

4. Points to Note When Attaching the Fixing Film

• Make sure that the cut off is toward the rear.

• Make sure that the front side is aligned with the groove of the heater.

Figure 6-218

5. Points to Note When Attaching the Heater Connector

• When attaching the heater connector to the fixing heater, take care not to damage the

heater.

• When tightening the screw, hold the connector taking care that its top and bottom are

free of pressure; be careful not to tighten the screw excessively.

Figure 6-219

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-20

Film edge

Screw

Heater connector

6. Points to Note When Replacing the Fixing Upper Unit

• If you have replaced the upper fixing unit, you must store the resistance of the heater

in service mode (No. 304; see p. 10-31.)

Caution:

Do not touch the surface of the heater.

7. Adjusting the Fixing Film Drive Roller Pressure

If a fixing fault occurs, be sure to go through the following to adjust the pressure of

the drive roller.

1) Detach the fixing cover.

2) Detach the inside cover of the copier’s front side.

3) Close the copier’s upper body, and insert the door switch actuator.

4) Press the service mode switch (SW302).

• The copier enters service mode, and the display indicates ‘1’.

5) Press ‘4’ on the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘4’.

6) Press the AE key.

• The copier enters operation check mode, and the display indicates ‘401’.

7) Press ‘5’ on the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘405’.

8) Press the Start key.

• The copier enters fixing film initial rotation mode (405) to return the fixing film to its

proper position.

• The fixing film stops automatically as soon as it reaches its proper position.

• The copier indicates the position of the film in the copy density indicator.

9) Open the copier’s top body.

10) Check that the arrow qis at the middle of the memory as shown in Figure 6-220.

Figure 6-220 (rear view)

11) Close the copier’s top body, and activate service mode.

12) Press ‘4’ on keypad; when the display indicates ‘4’, press the AE key.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-21

13) Press ‘4’ on the keypad; when the display indicates ‘404’, press the Start key.

• The copier enters fixing tension roller mode (404).

• The fixing tension roller becomes fixed, and the fixing film rotates idly.

• The count indicator indicates how long the fixing film sensor has remained on.

Caution:

If the copy count indicator keeps indicating ‘0’ or ‘528’ during adjustment,

immediately press the Stop key to de-activate service mode.

If the copy countis ‘180’ or higher and ‘348’ or lower and has not changed, go to step

17). Or, if 10’s and 100’s do not change, go to step 17);

14) Loosen the fixing screw wslightly; i.e., move it to the left about 1 mm.

15) Turn the adjusting screw eso that the copy count is ‘180’ or higher’ and ‘348’ or

lower.

Caution:

Adjust so that 10’s and 100’s will not change; ignore 1’s may change ±5.)

• A clockwise turn decreases the reading.

• A counterclockwise turn increases the reading.

Figure 6-221

16) When the reading in the copy counter is appropriately correct, tighten the screw w;

make sure that the reading is appropriate after tightening the screw.

17) Press the Start key.

• The copier enters check mode (404), and the fixing film rotates idly for about 2.5

min; check that the fixing film has not shifted from the adjusted position.

• The copy count indicator indicates “ ” or “ ”; if “ ” is indicated, repeat steps

starting with 13).

If “ ” is indicated, repeat steps 4) through 10).

18) Attach the cover.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-22

8. Detaching the Lower Fixing Unit

1) Detach the delivery roller. (See “1. Detaching the Delivery Roller.” on p. 6-28.)

2) Detach the delivery cover.

3) Remove the screw q, and detach the fixing shutter open/close block w.

Figure 6-222

4) Remove the E-ring e, and detach the lower fixing unit r.

Figure 6-223

Caution:

Do not touch the surface of the fixing cleaning roller or the lower fixing roller.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-23

9. Detaching the Separation Claw/Lower Fixing Claw and Fixing Cleaning Roller

1) Detach the front door.

2) Remove the screw q, and detach the separation claw unit w.

Figure 6-224

3) Detach the separation claw efrom the separation claw unit.

Caution:

Take care not to misplace the spring.

4) Detach the lower fixing roller rtogether with the bushing t.

Figure 6-225

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-24

5) Detach the bushing yfound at the front, and detach the HIGH-TEMPERATURE

WARNING cover u.

Figure 6-226

6) Lift the fixing cleaning roller to detach.

10. Adjusting the Lower Fixing Roller Nip

If fixing faults occur, make the following adjustments.

The nip is correct if as shown below; otherwise, turn the bolt to make adjustments.

Figure 6-227

Note:

a and c represent points 10 mm from both ends of copy paper.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-25

·········

········· ·········

·········

A4 size

Feeding

direction b Center of paper

b : 4±1mm

| a-c | : 1mm or less

a. Measuring the Nip

Measure the nip immediately after turning on the copier before the beginning of a

work day.

1) Open the copyboard cover, and make a solid black copy in A4.

2) Place the copy in the multifeeder with the solid black face up.

3) Press the service mode switch (SW302) using a hex key.

• The copier enters service mode, and the display indicates ‘1’.

4) Press ‘4’ on the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘4’.

5) Press the AE key.

• The copier enters operation/check mode, and the display indicates ‘401’.

6) Press ‘6 on the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘406’.

7) Press the Start key.

• The above operations cause the multifeeder to pick up paper so that you can take

measurements as in Figure 6-227; the paper will then be discharged.

Reference:

The copy paper stops while it is half way under the fixing roller; and, about 10 sec

later, it will be automatically discharged.

8) Measure the nip.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-26

B. Delivery Assembly

1. Detaching the Delivery Roller

1) Open the copier’s top body.

2) Remove the E-ring q.

3) Shift the bushing w(rear) and bushing e(front); then, detach the delivery roller r.

Figure 6-228

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-27

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-28

CHAPTER 7

EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

I. POWER SUPPLY ...............................7-1

A. Outline ...........................................7-1

B. Power Supply Circuit Assembly.....7-2

C. Detecting Errors in the Power

Supply PCB ...................................7-4

D. Protection Mechanisms for the

Power Supply Circuit .....................7-5

II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......7-6

A. External Covers.............................7-6

B. Control Panel.................................7-9

C. Fans...............................................7-10

D. Main Motor/Main Drive Assembly..7-11

E. Cassette unit .................................7-14

F. DC Controller PCB ........................7-17

G. Composite Power Supply PCB......7-18

H. AE Sensor PCB.............................7-21

I. Intensity Sensor PCB ....................7-21

This chapter shows the copier’s external parts, and explains the principles used for the copier’s

various control mechanisms in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation

to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and

adjusted.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-1

I. POWER SUPPLY

A. Outline

Figure 7-101

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-2

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

B. Power Supply Circuit Assembly

The copier’s power supply assembly is a composite power supply circuit which uses

a single main transformer (T101) as the source of DC power, high-voltage power, and

power for the fluorescent lamp.

AC power is supplied to the DC power supply assembly when the power switch

(SW829) and the door switch are turned on.

When the power switch on the control panel is pressed, signals are sent to the

composite power supply assembly to generate internal power supply +5 Vin.

In response, the microprocessor (Q512) turns on to turn on relays RL101 and RL501

to supply power.

The DC power supply generates +34 V, +24 V, and +5 V.

When the power switch is pressed for a second time, the microprocessor turns off

RL501 and the main transformer; thereafter, it turns off Q503 to turn off RL101, thereby

cutting off +5 Vin.

The condition deprives the DC controller circuit of DC power; to compensate for the

absence of power, a lithium battery (BAT301) is provided to back up the data in the RAM

(Q307) in the DC controller circuit.

Caution:

Voltage is supplied up to the AC power supply even when the power is off.

Caution:

Replace the lithium battery only with the one listed in the Parts Catalog. Use of a

different battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a

fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, or

dispose of it in fire.

Keep the battery out of reach of children and discare any used battery promptly.

Reference:

The tolerances for the DC voltage are as follows:

• +34 V ±20%

• +24 V ±5%

• + 5 V ±5%

However, the above applies only when the error in the AC input is limited to ±10%.

Figure 7-102

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-3

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

C. Detecting Errors in the Power Supply PCB

The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB either displays an

error message on the display by communicating with the DC controller or flashes

LED501 to indicate the presence of an error if any of the following is identified.

1. Communication Error between DC Controller PCB and Composite Power

Supply PCB

If an error occurs in the communication between the DC controller PCB and the

composite power supply PCB, E240 is indicated as soon as it is detected by the

microprocessor on the DC controller PCB. If an error is detected by the composite power

supply, the LED is flashed at intervals of 5 sec.

2. Error in the High-Voltage Output Data

If the difference between the setting associated with the high voltage generated by

the microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB and the control value is

greater than the specified value, the microprocessor (Q512) sends error data to the DC

controller PCB, which in turn indicates E064.

3. Low-Voltage Output Data Error

If the difference between the setting associated with the low voltage generated by the

microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB and the control value is

greater than the specified value, the microprocessor (Q512) communicates with the DC

controller PCB, which in turn indicates E803.

4. Overcurrent in the Low-voltage Power Supply

If the composite power supply PCB identifies overcurrent because of an error in a DC

load or wire is trapped, the LED is flashed at intervals of 2 sec for 20 sec.

Reference:

Normally, the LED is flashing at intervals of 0.5 sec.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-4

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

D. Protection Mechanisms for the Power Supply Circuit

The composite power supply PCB is equipped with an overcurrent detection circuit;

if a short circuit occurs in a load for some reason, the protection mechanism is activated

to stop the output.

When the output is cut out, you may reset the output by opening the front door to turn

off the door switch, correcting the load, and turning on the door switch and power switch

(SW829) once again.

Caution:

Be sure to disconnect the connector (J4) of the fixing heater before resetting the

output.

Repeated short circuiting and resetting can cause the built-in fuse (FU101) to blow.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-5

II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to

disassemble/assemble the machine.

Be sure to observe the following whenever disassemblig/assembling the machine:

1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.

2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to

disassemble them.

3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. A washer is used for one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against

static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.

5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure

correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.

6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.

7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front

door switch or the power switch.

A. External Covers

qCopyboard cover tControl panel

wLeft cover yFront door

eDelivery cover uCassette

rCopyboard iUpper left cover

Figure 7-201

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-6

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

oRight cover !2 Lower right cover

!0 Upper rear cover !3 Lower right back

!1 Rear cover

Figure 202 cover

Note:

Detach the covers when cleaning, inspecting, or repairing the inside of the copier

as necessary.

Covers that may be detached merely by removing their respective mounting screws

are omitted from the discussion.

Caution:

When attaching the rear cover, be sure that the harness is housed inside the upper

rear cover so that its portion shown in the diagram will not spring out the cover or

the harness will not come into contact with the connector plate.

Figure 7-203

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-7

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

When attaching the copyboard glass, make sure that it is firmly in contact with the

vertical size plate without a gap to prevent intrusion of foreign matter.

Figure 7-204

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-8

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

B. Control Panel

1. Detaching the Control Panel

1) Detach the copyboard glass.

2) Detach the upper left cover.

3) Open the front door.

4) Pull the copier’s open/close lever to open the copier.

5) Detach the upper rear cover.

6) Detach the right cover.

7) Detach the left cover.

8) Remove the five screws q, and detach the inside cover w.

Figure 7-205

9) Disconnect the two connectors r(J309, J310) on the DC controller PCB; then,

detach the control panel t.

Figure 7-206 Figure 7-207

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-9

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

C. Fans

1. Detaching the Exhaust Fan

1) Open the front door.

2) Pull the copier’s open/close lever to open the copier.

3) Detach the DC controller PCB. (See “1. Detaching the DC Controller PCB” on p. 7-17.)

4) Remove the screw qat the copier’s rear, and remove the two screws wat the front.

Figure 7-208 Figure 7-209

5) Pull out the exhaust fan assembly etoward the front while supporting it.

Figure 7-210

6) Remove the four screws r, and detach the exhaust fan t.

Figure 7-211

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-10

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

rrt

D. Main Motor/Main Drive Assembly

1. Detaching the Main Motor Unit

1) Detach the rear cover.

2) Disconnect the two connectors q, and remove the three screws w; then, detach the

main motor unit e.

Figure 7-212

2. Detaching the Main Drive Assembly

1) Open the front door.

2) Pull out the drum cartridge.

3) Detach the multifeeder unit.

4) Detach the rear cover.

5) Detach the main motor.

6) Remove the clip ring q, and disconnect the connector w; then, detach the

registration clutch e.

Figure 7-213

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-11

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

7) Remove the screw r, and detach the composite power supply support plate t.

Figure 7-214

8) Detach the belt from the belt tensioner yof the fixing drive assembly.

Figure 7-215

9) Turn the pulley iclockwise, and detach the belt o.

Figure 7-216

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-12

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-13

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

10) Remove the E-ring !0 and clip ring !1; then, detach the bushing !2. In this condition,

detach the gear and pulley !3 from the main drive assembly.

Figure 7-217

3. Routing the Drive Belt

Route the drive belt attaching them to the pulley and the tensioner as shown in

Figure 4-218.

Figure 7-218

E. Cassette unit

1. Detaching the Pick-Up Drive Unit

1) Detach the rear cover and right cover.

2) Remove the screw q.

Figure 7-219

3) Remove the screw w, and detach the harness guide e.

Figure 7-220

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-14

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

4) Remove the four screws r, and disconnect the two connectors t; then, detach the

pick-up drive unit y.

Figure 7-221

2. Detaching the Cassette Motor

1) Detach the rear cover.

2) Remove the two screws q, and disconnect the connector w(J114); then, detach the

motor e.

Figure 7-222

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-15

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

3. Detaching the Cassette Driver PCB

1) Detach the rear cover.

2) Disconnect all connectors from the cassette driver PCB q.

3) Remove the three screws w, and detach the driver PCB q.

Figure 7-223

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-16

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-17

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

F. DC Controller PCB

1. Detaching the DC Controller PCB

1) Disconnect the connector of the DC controller.

2) Remove the four screws q, and detach the DC controller PCB together with its

mount.

Figure 7-224

2. Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB

• When sending the DC controller PCB to the workshop or factory, put it in a conducting

bag while keeping it intact with the mount. Use a conducting bag whose one side is

transparent, and make sure that the face of the DC controller PCB shows through the

transparent side of the bag.

• After replacement, perform following; see p. 7-20:

qenter the value recorded on the service label;

wadjust the multifeeder paper width sensor;

eadjust the intensioy of the scanning lamp; and

radjust AE.

G. Composite Power Supply PCB

1. Detaching the Composite Power Supply PCB

1) Detach the lower rear cover and the delivery cover.

2) Remove the screw q, and detach the switch support plate w.

3) Remove the screw e, and detach the power cord cover 1 r.

Figure 7-225

4) Remove the screw t, and shift the power cord cover 2 y.

5) Disconnect the AC connector u, and remove the screw ito detach the grounding

wire o.

Figure 7-226

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-18

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-19

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

6) Remove the three screws !0, and detach the power cord mount !1.

Figure 7-227

7) Disconnect all connectors from the composite power supply PCB.

8) Remove the screw !2, and detach the grounding wire !3; then, detach the harness

guide !4 from the power supply side plate.

Figure 7-228

9) Remove the screw !5, and detach the composite power supply PCB !6.

Figure 7-229

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-20

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Points to Note When Handling the Composite Power Supply PCB

• Some capacitors used on the PCB may retain charges even when the copier remains

off. For this reason, you must take care never to short the terminals of the capacitor

whenever you have detached the PCB.

• Enter the settings (Nos. 315 through 318) recorded on the label attached to the

composite power supply (service part) in service mode. (See p. 10-103)

H. AE Sensor PCB

1. Points to Note When Replacing the AE Sensor

• After replacement, perform the following; see p. 10-11:

qAdjust AE.

I. Intensity Sensor PCB

1. Points to Note When Replacing the Intensity Sensor

• After replacement, perform the following; see p. 10-11:

qAdjust the intensity of the scanning lamp; and

wAdjust AE.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-21

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-22

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

CHAPTER 8

INSTALLATION

I. SELECTING THE SITE......................8-1

II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING

THE COPIER......................................8-2

A. Unpacking and Removing

Fixings ...........................................8-2

B. Turning On the Copier ...................8-5

C. Checking the Images and

Operations.....................................8-8

D. Attaching the Drum Unit ................8-9

E. Changing the Cassette Size..........8-10

III. RELOCATING THE COPIER..............8-13

IV. REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT .........8-14

V. INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD

IV N.....................................................8-17

VI. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...........8-19

A. Unpacking......................................8-19

B. Installation (to a Cassette

Feeding Module-A2/B2).................8-20

VII. INSTALLING THE REMOTE

DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II....................8-26

A. Unpacking......................................8-26

B. Installation to the Copier ...............8-27

This chapter introduces requirements for the site of installation, and shows how the copier may be

installed using step-by-step instructions.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-1

I. SELECTING THE SITE

Keep the following in mind when selecting the site of installation; if possible, pay a

visit to the user’s before the delivery of the machine.

1. The site must provide a power outlet that may be used exclusively for the machine

and that meets the rating ±10%.

2. The site must be 7.5°C/45.5°F to 30°C/86.0°F in temperature and 10% RH to 80%

RH in humidity. In particular, avoid areas near water faucets, boilers, humidifiers, or

refrigerators.

3. Avoid areas near sources of fire, areas subject to dust or ammonium gas, or areas

exposed to the direct rays of the sun; if necessary, provide curtains to shut out the

sun.

4. The site must be well ventilated.

5. Make sure that the floor will remain in contact with the copier’s feet and will keep the

copier level.

6. Make sure that there will be work space that meets the measurements shown in

Figure 8-101; in other words, there must be distances A and B around the copier

when measured with its front door open.

Figure 8-101

A: 50cm/

B: 10cm/19.7in

3.9in

II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE COPIER

When a metal part is brought in from a cold to warm environment, droplets of water

can develop on the surface of the part. This phenomenon is called condensation, and

condensation in a copier can lead to faulty images. If the copier has been moved from a

cold to warm place, leave it alone for about one hour or more before unpacking it.

A. Unpacking and Removing Fixings

Work

Unpack the copier.

Detach the plastic cover, and

place the copier on the

pedestal holding its grips; be

sure to work in a group of two.

Install the Cassette Feeding

Module-B2 or -A2 (accessory)

according to its Installation

Procedure if the copier is to be

placed on it.

Open the cardboard box, and

take out all the accessories.

Remove all tape from the

outside of the copier. Take out

the cassette from the cardboard

box, and remove the cushions

from inside the cassette; then,

slide the cassette into the copier.

Remove the tape from the

scanner fixing found on the

outside of the left cover,

remove the screw, and slide the

fixing to the right to detach it to

the front.

• Keep the fixing stored for

possible relocation of the

machine.

Remarks

Check that none of the following accessories is missing:

•

Copy tray

•

Installation Procedure

•

Cassette (Universal)

•

Operator’s Manual

Make sure that the paper size plate and size label

(1 pc. each) is inside the cassette.

Step

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-2

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-3

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Open the copyboard cover,

and remove the protective

sheet.

Open the front cover, and push

the lever found on the left side

up in the direction of the arrow

to open the copier’s top body.

Pull up the spacer (front and

rear, 1 pc. each) of the fixing

roller in the direction of the

arrow until a click is heard.

Remove the two pieces of

cardboard (cushion) from the

feeding assembly.

RemarksStep

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-4

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Pull the developing locking

lever toward the front, and turn

it clockwise to release it.

Remove the knob, and remove

the dummy drum from the

copier. (Keep the knob for

later.)

Remove the screw, and

remove the developing

assembly stopper.

Remove the developing

assembly, and check that the

developing cylinder is free of

scratches or dirt.

Install the developing assem-

bly, and attach the developing

assembly stopper with a screw.

Engage the developing

assembly.

Close the copier’s top unit.

RemarksStep

B. Turning On the Copier

Step

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-5

Work

Connect the power plug to the

power outlet.

Turn on the power switch.

Turn off the power switch.

Supply toner according to the

instructions given on the toner

supply label attached behind

the front door.

Release the developing

assembly by the developing

assembly locking lever.

Install the drum unit.

Lock the developing assembly,

and close the copier’s top unit.

Insert the door switch activator

into the door switch, and turn

on the power.

Remarks

• Make sure that the power outlet is the rating

±10%.

Make sure that the Add Paper message flashes.

• Press the keypad and the Clear key to make

sure that the copy count indication is correct.

When turning the toner cartridge counterclock-

wise to set it, you must fully turn it until it is

locked; the developing assembly can cause a

fault if you operate the machine without locking

the cartridge.

See “D. Attaching the Drum Unit.”

Caution:

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-6

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Select service mode No.

313/314, and enter the settings

recorded on the drum label.

To select service mode,

• Press the service mode

switch (SW302) with a hex

key.

Select ‘3’ of the mode by

pressing ‘3’ on the keypad

and AE key; then, select ‘No.

3 xx’ by pressing ‘x’ and ‘x’

on the keypad and the start

key.

Execute ‘No. 401’ in service

mode.

• Press the service mode

switch (SW302), ‘4’ on the

keypad, AE Key, and Start

key in sequence.

Make sure that step 10 has

been completed; then, turn off

the power, and open the

copier’s top unit.

Remove the static eliminator,

and clean it with the static

eliminator brush; then, set the

static eliminator.

Remarks

To enter settings,

• Select ‘No. 313’ in service mode, and enter the

setting recorded on the label (PRIMARY) using

the keypad. (To enter ‘-’, press the % key before

entering the setting.)

Then, press the Start key to store the setting.

To enter the setting for IP_OFST, select ‘No. 314’

in service mode and work in the same way.

The copier supplies toner from the toner container

to the developing assembly (about 5 min).

• Do not turn off the power or remove the door

switch actuator while the machine is operat-

ing.

Step

Caution:

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-7

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Remarks

The copier automatically sets the APVC value; it

stops in about 23 sec.

See “E. Changing the Size.”

• Make sure that the Add Paper message turns off.

• Make sure that the paper indicator matches with

the APVC value; it stops in about 23 sec.

size of the cassette.

• Press the keys on the control panel other than

the Copy Start key to make sure that all

respective operations are normal.

Step

Work

Turn on the power.

Execute ‘No. 412’ in service

mode.

• Press the service mode

swicth (SW302), ‘4’ on the

keypad, AE key, ‘1’ and ‘2’ on

the keypad, and Start key in

sequence.

Set the settings for user mode

and settings mode in service

mode to suit the needs of the

user.

Tailor the cassette to suit the

desired size by operating the

size guide plate and size

detecting lever; then, attach

the size label.

Put copy paper in the cassette,

and set the cassette in the

copier.

Attach the copy tray.

Remove the door switch acti-

vator, and close the front door.

C. Checking the Images and Operations

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-8

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Place the Test Sheet on the

copyboard, and check the

copies.

Make copies in manual mode.

Make sure that the external

covers are free from scratches

and deformations.

Clean the area around the

copier.

Move the machine to its site of

installation.

Check/Remarks

• Make sure there is no abnormal sound.

• Check the copy images for each standard

reproduction ratio.

• Make sure that as many copies as specified are

made normally.

• If the copy image is faulty, perform the “Image

Adjustment Basic Procedure.”

Make sure that the copying operation is normal.

Make sure that the copier is more or less level.

Step

D. Attaching the Drum Unit

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-9

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Unpack the drum unit, and

remove the light-blocking

sheet.

Remove the primary charging

roller releasing spacer.

Set the drum unit to the copier,

and fix it in position using the

knob used to keep the dummy

drum.

Fill out the label, and attach it

to the drum unit cover.

Check/Remarks

Take care not to damage the surface of the drum

and not to touch the primary charging roller.

Be sure to insert the drum unit straight along the

copier’s rail.

Step

Releasing spacer

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-10

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

E. Changing the Cassette Size

Change the cassette size to suit the user’s needs.

1) Slide the cassette out of the copier.

2) Move the length plate inside the cassette to suit the length of the paper size.

Figure 8-201

3) Move the width plate inside the cassette to suit the width of the paper to be used.

Figure 8-202

A4R LTR R B5R A4/A5R A5

STMT

LTR STMTR

A4R LTR R B5R A4/A5R A5

STMT

LTR STMTR

4) Move the paper size lever found toward the front of the cassette so that it is aligned

with the size of the paper to be used.

Figure 8-203

Caution:

Failure to adjust the paper size lever will lead to jams or soiling.

5) Take out the paper size plates for the cassette, and pick out the four plates

representing the most frequently used size; attach the labels.

Figure 8-204

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-11

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

A5R B5R A4R A B B A A

U STMTRLTRR STM LGL LTR 11x17

6) Set the paper size plates selected in step 4).

Figure 8-205

Caution:

If you are setting the plate for the position representing the universal (u) cassette,

you must perform the work described for “universal cassette paper size setting

(505); see p. 10-44.

■Points to Note When Handling the Photosensitive Drum after Installation

The copier’s photosensitive drum is highly susceptible to light; mere exposure to

room light can affect the drum enough to produce white spots or black lines on the

copies. Keep the following in mind:

• Do not spend more than 5 min when removing jams.

• After detaching the drum unit from the copier during servicing work, be sure to

protect it in the light-blocking sheet that came with the drum or fresh copy paper,

and place the drum in a dark place.

Do not touch the photosensitive drum or primary charging roller.

If you have soiled the surface of the drum inadvertently, wipe it using a flannel cloth

coated with toner; do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.

Do not dry wipe or use solvent to clean the drum.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-12

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

After setting the size plate, make sure it corresponds to the paper size you have selected.

III. RELOCATING THE COPIER

If you must relocate the copier by truck or using other means of transportation,

perform the following work:

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-13

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Move the lens to the Direct

position.

Take out the drum unit.

Fix the scanner in place.

Tape the front door and delivery

assembly in place.

Place A3 copy paper on the

copyboard glass, and tape the

copyboard cover in place.

Checks

Put the drum unit in a

box for transport.

Step

Remarks

Direct position

refers to

the position of the lens

after warm-up initiated

by power-on.

Use the fixing removed

at time of installation.

IV. REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT

Go through the following when replacing the drum unit:

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-14

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Turn off the copier, and open

the front door and the copier’s

top unit.

Release the developing

assembly, and remove the

knob to remove the drum unit.

Unpack the new drum unit, and

remove the light-blocking

sheet.

Remove the primary charging

roller releasing spacer.

Set the drum unit to the copier,

and attach the knob used to fix

the old drum unit.

Remarks

Take care not to damage the surface of the drum

and not to touch the primary charging roller.

Step

Releasing spacer

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-15

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Fill out the label, and attach it

to the drum unit cover.

Lock the developing assembly,

and close the copier’s top unit.

Turn on the door switch using

the door switch actuator; then,

shift the power switch to ‘ON’.

Select service mode No.

313/314, and enter the settings

recorded on the drum label.

To select service mode,

• Press the service mode

switch (SW302) with a hex

key.

Select ‘3’ of the mode by

pressing ‘3’ on the keypad

and AE key; then, select ‘No.

3 xx’ by pressing ‘x’ and ‘x’

on the keypad and the start

key.

Turn off the power, and open

the copier’s top unit.

Replace the static eliminator.

Turn on the power.

Remarks

To enter settings,

• Select ‘No. 313’ in service mode, and enter the

setting recorded on the label (PRIMARY) using

the keypad. (To enter ‘-’, press the % key before

entering the setting.)

Then, press the Start key to store the setting.

To enter the setting for IP_OFST, select ‘No. 314’

in service mode and work in the same way.

Step

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-16

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Execute ‘No. 412’ in service

mode.

• Press the service mode

swicth (SW302), ‘4’ on the

keypad, AE key, ‘1’ and ‘2’ on

the keypad, and Start key in

sequence.

Remove the door switch actua-

tor, and close the front door.

Remarks

The copier automatically sets the APVC value; it

stops in about 23 sec.

Step

V. INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD IV N

Caution:

Be sure to disconnect the copier’s power plug before starting the installation work.

1) Open the front cover

2) Open the copier’s top body by operating its open/close lever.

3) Detach the front cover.

4) Take out the cartridge.

5) Detach the inside cover.

6) Loosen the screw on the upper rear cover.

7) Loosen the two screws on the copyboard glass.

8) Detach the face plate qfrom the control card cable inlet.

When detaching the face plate q, detach it in the direction of the arrow using

pliers or screwdriver.

Figure 8-501

9) Fix the Control Card IV N to the copier using a screw w(M4×12); at the time, be use

that the copier’s emboss eis fitted in the hole in the Control Card IV N.

Figure 8-502

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-17

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

()

10) Disconnect the copier’s dummy connector r.

Figure 8-503

11) Connect the connector tof the Control Card IV N.

Figure 8-504

12) Connect the copier’s power plug, and turn on its power switch to check the operation

of the Control Card IV N.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-18

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

VI.CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5 INSTALLATION PROCE-

DURE

A. Unpacking

Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the parts shown in Fig.

8-601 is missing.

Figure 8-601

qCassette Heater...............................1 tCord clamp ......................................1

wMounting plate 1 ..............................1 yBinding screw (black; M4×6) ...........2

eMounting plate 2 ..............................1 uTP screw (white; M3×6)...................2

rRelay harness..................................1

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-19

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

B. Installation (to a Cassette Feeding Module-A2/B2)

1) Remove the cassettes and all rear covers from the cassette feeding unit/pedestal.

2) Remove the copier’s rear cover.

3) Install the mounting plate 2 to the cassette heater with two screws (black; M4×6).

Figure 8-602

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-20

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Cassette heater

Screw

Mounting plate 2

4) Insert the bend found at the rear of the heater into the heater mounting slit in the rear

side plate of the cassette feeding unit/pedestal (bottom holder).

Figure 8-603

5) Open the cover on the front of the cassette feeding unit/module, and fix the mounting

plate 2 in place to the front side plate with two screws (white; M3×6).

Figure 8-604

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-21

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Screws

6) Close the cover.

7) Connect the connector on the relay harness to the connector of the cassette heater

(rear side plate of the cassette feeding unit). (Connect the side where the harness

is bundled with a tie-wrap.)

Figure 8-605

8) Install the cord clamp to the hole in the rear side plate of the cassette feeding

unit/pedestal.

• Cassette Feeding Module-A2

Figure 8-606

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-22

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Connector Cord clamp

Tie-wrap

Cord clamp

• Cassette Feeding Module-B2

Figure 8-607

9) Lead the other connector on the relay harness through the copier’s bottom plate as

shown.

Figure 8-608

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-23

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Cord clamp

Copier's connector

Molded member

Copier's base plate

10) Connect the connector on the relay harness with the copier’s connector.

Figure 8-609

11) Fix the relay harness in place to the rear side plate with the cord clamp.

• Cassette Feeding Module-A2

Figure 8-610

Caution:

Make sure that the relay harness is outside the area indicated by dashed lines to

prevent it from interfering with the feet of the cassette.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-24

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Relay harness

• Cassette Feeding Module-B2

Figure 8-611

Caution:

Make sure that the relay harness is outside the area indicated by dashed lines to

prevent it from interfering with the feet of the cassette.

12) Install the rear cover of the cassette pedestal and all covers.

13) Install the copier’s rear cover.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-25

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

VII. INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC

DEVICE II

A. Unpacking

Figure 8-701

qRDD ..........................................1 unit tSwitch setting label..................1 pcs.

wPower Supply Unit.....................1 unit yGrounding wire*.........................1 pc.

eScrew (M4×6)...........................4 pcs. uFerrite core ...............................1 pc.

rHarness band...........................2 pcs. *Not used.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-26

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

y*Not used

*Not used

B. Installation to the Copier

Caution:

This model may not be available for sale in some areas.

Caution:

Keep the following in mind when installing the RDD to the copier:

1. This Accessory is to be installed by a qualified personal.

2. Make sure the copier has been properly installed before starting the work.

3. Keep the copier’s power cord disconnected during the work.

4. Be sure to use the appropriate screws (length, diameter).

5. Make sure the computer in the service station has been properly loaded with the

RDD’s settings data.

1) Remove the two screws wto detach the RDD’s top cover q.

Figure 8-702

2) Connect the Power Supply Unit’s connector eto the RDD’s connector ras shown.

Figure 8-703

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-27

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

3) Remove the two screws y, and detach the face cover tfrom the copier’s rear cover.

Fig. 8-704

4) Connect the cable oon the copier side and the RDD’s cable i.

Note:

If a conversion connector is found on the cable !1 from the copier, remove it.

Fig. 8-705

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-28

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

y y

Fig. 8-706

5) Fix the RDD in place on the copier’s rear cover with four screws y; use the screws

removed from the copier.

Modular Jack on the Right

Fig. 8-707

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-29

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

6) Remove the slack from the cable between the copier and the RDD; keep the excess

cable to the RDD using the harness band !0.

Fig. 8-708

7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch 2 !1 to ON so that the communication mode between the

RDD and the copier is IPC mode.

Fig. 8-709

8) If the ROM IC6 !2 is mounted on the RDD’s PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 !3 to

ON; otherwise, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 to OFF.

Note:

1. If the ROM (IC6; !2) is not mounted, you need not mount it.

2. If you are mounting or replacing the ROM (IC6; !2 for upgrading the RDD, be

sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 !3 to ON.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-30

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

12345678

SW2

Fig. 8-710

9) Set the bits of the DIP switch 3 !4 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table.

Fig. 8-711

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-31

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

12345678

SW2

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

SW2

123456

Table 8-701

10) Fit the Power Supply Unit into the power plug, and check that LED 1 !5 (green) on

the RDD’s PCB comes on.

Fig. 5-712

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-32

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Switch

SW3-1

SW3-2

SW3-3

SW3-4

SW3-5

SW3-6

Setting

AII

OFF

–

Description

selects push pulse for RDD circuit confihuration

selscts dial pulse for RDD circuit confihuration

sets dial pulse speed to 20 PPS

sets dial pulse speed to 10 PPS

reserved

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

SW2

11) Reset the RDD’s RAM.

Set the bits on the DIP switch 2 !6 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table, and

press the push switch 4 !7 to make sure that LED5 !8 (red) comes on.

Table 8-702

Fig. 8-713

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-33

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

12345678

SW2

bits on SW2

SW2-1

SW2-2

SW2-3

SW2-4

SW2-5

SW2-6

SW2-7

SW2-8

Setting

OFF

See step 9).

OFF

12) After making sure that LED5 !8 (red) has come on, set the bits on the DIP switch 2

!6 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table, and press the push switch 4 !7 to

make sure that LED5 !8 (red) goes out, indicating that the RAM has been reset.

Table 8-703

Fig. 8-714

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-34

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

bits on SW2

SW2-1

SW2-2

SW2-3

SW2-4

SW2-5

SW2-6

SW2-7

SW2-8

Setting

OFF

See step 9).

OFF

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

12345678

SW2

13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch 2 !9 on the RDD’s PCB to OFF.

Fig. 8-715

14) Connect the RDD to the telephone line.

If you are connecting the RDD on its own, connect the modular jack cable to the

RDD’s connector @0 (LINE).

If you will be using the RDD’s extra circuit, connect the existing telephone or fax

machine to the RDD’s connector @1 (TEL), and connect the telephone circuit to the

RDD’s connector @0 (LINE).

Fig. 8-716

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-35

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

12345678

SW2

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

@1 @0

SW2

15) Call up the service station, and request the RDD’s initial settings. (LED 4 @2 (red)

starts to flash upon receipt.)

Fig. 8-717

16) Call up the service station to check if the initial settings have been successfully

made; if the attempt has failed, reset the RAM once again starting with step 11)

through 13).

Important:

You must confirm that the RDD’s settings are correct by calling the service station.

17) Check that you can place a telephone call from the RDD to the computer in the

service station.

Press the push switch 4 !7. LED6 @3 (red) should come on; it will go out when

transmission ends successfully, or will start to flash if transmission fails.

Retransmission is executed in response to a press on the push switch 4 !7 while

LED6 @3 is flashing.

Transmission is canceled in response to a press on the push switch 1 @4 while LED6

@3 is flashing.

Fig. 8-718

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-36

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

SW2

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

SW2

18) Check that the communications between the RDD and the copier are executed

normally.

Connect the copier’s power plug, and switch it on to make sure that LED 2 @5

(orange) flashes.

Fig. 8-719

19) Press the copier’ COPY START key to make sure that LED3 @6 (pink) flashes each

time a copy is delivered.

Fig. 8-720

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-37

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

SW2

LED1 LED2 LED3

LED5

LED6

LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4 SW3

BAT1

CN4

CN3 CN2

SW2

20) Attach the Switch setting label @7, to the RDD’s top cover q; then, record the setting

of each switch on the label.

Fig. 8-721

21) Fix the RDD’s top cover qin place using two screws w. (Make sure that the Power

Unit’s cable is fixed in place on the cable guide inside the RDD and is not trapped by

the top cover q.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-38

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 9

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED

PARTS ................................................9-1

A. Periodically Replaced Parts...........9-1

II. DURABLES ........................................9-2

A. Copier............................................9-2

B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/

Cassette Feeding Module-A2........9-3

III. PERIODICAL SERVICING .................9-4

IV. SERVICING CHART...........................9-5

V. NOTES ON DRUM KIT ......................9-6

This chapter provides tables of periodically replaced parts and consumables/durables and

scheduled servicing charts.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS

Some parts of the copier must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific

level of performance; replace them as indicated regardless of the presence of visible

damage.

Plan the replacement to coincide with a scheduled visit.

A. Periodically Replaced Parts

Note:

The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on the future

data.

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-1

No.

Parts name

Static eliminator

as of JAN. 1997

Parts No.

FG5-2912

Q’ty

Life (copies)

60,000

Remarks

II. DURABLES

The parts shown in the table may require replacement because of deterioration or

damage over the period of warranty; replace them when they fail using the table as a

guide.

A. Copier

Note:

1.The life represents the number of copies actually made using the part.

2.The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.

Remarks

See Note 1.

Replace

with item 12

or 12-1

through 12-4

Parts name

Pick-up roller

Pick-up separation pad

Multifeeder pick-up roller

Multifeeder separation pad

Fluorescent lamp

Fixing cleaning roller

Transfer roller

Upper fixing unit 220/240V

Lower fixing roller

Lower fixing separation claw

Pre-exposure lamp

Developing assembly

Developing cylinder

Side seal

Developing blade unit

No.

12-1

12-2

12-4

Parts No.

FB3-5153-00P

FG5-2922-020

FB1-8581-000

FB2-2167-000

FH7-3271-000

FB3-4494-00P

FB2-2223-000

FG5-2928-140

FB2-2316-000

FB1-7275-000

FG5-2891-000

FG5-3275-04P

FB2-3834-000

FB2-3825-00P

FG5-7012-00P

Q’ty

Life (copies)

100,000

200,000

100,000

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-2

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

as of JAN 1997

B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/Cassette Feeding Module-A2

Note:

The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-3

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

No.

Parts name

Pick-up roller

Pick-up separation pad

as of JAN 1997

Parts No.

FB2-2251-000

FG5-3614-000

Q’ty

Life (copies)

100,000

Remarks

Actual usage

III. PERIODICAL SERVICING

The copier does not have items that require periodical servicing; however, it is

recommended that the following work items be performed during any visit to the user’s.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-4

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Work

Meet the person in charge of the

copier.

Make test copies in Direct,

Reduce, Enlarge, and page

separation.

Clean the static eliminator and

feeding assembly.

Clean the fixing/delivery assembly.

• paper guide plate

• separation claw

Perform work according to the number

of copies made (See p. 9-2).

Clean the copyboard cover and

copyboard glass.

Make test copies.

Make sample copies.

Arrange the sample copies, and

clean the area around the copier.

Record the final counter reading.

Fill out the Servicing Sheet, and

report to the person in charge.

Checks

Check the general

conditions.

Check the following:

a. image density

b. white background

for soiling

c. characters (clarity)

d. leading edge

(non-image width)

e. left/right margin

f. fixing, registra-

tion,back (soiling)

g. abnormal noise

h. counter (operation)

Step

Remarks

standard:

2.5 ±1.5 mm

(Direct, one-sided)

standard:

2.5 ±1.5 mm

(Direct/one-sided)

Use the special brush

(accessory) to clean

the static eliminator.

Use solvent.

IV. SERVICING CHART

Caution:

Do not use solvents or oils other than those specified.

: clean : replace

✩: lubricate : adjust : inspector clean

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-5

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Parts

Copyboard glass

Pick-up roller

Scanner rail

Transfer guide assembly

Feeding belt

Feeding assembly

mount

Reflecting plate for

original exposure

Side reflecting plate for

original exposure

No. 1 through No. 6

mirrors

Lens

Dust-proofing glass

Clearner base

Charging roller

Charging roller cleaner

Static eliminator

Developing spacer

every

20,000

Unit

External

Pick-up

assembly

Scanner

drive

assembly

Feeding

assembly

Optical

assembly

Drum kit

Charging

assembly

Developing

assembly

Remarks

Use alcohol.

Use alcohol solution; then,

apply lubricant.

Use a moist cloth.

Use a blower brush; if the

soiling is excessive, use

alcohol.

Actual use of the drum kit.

every

60,000

✩

V. NOTES ON DRUM KIT

Caution:

Do NOT throw the drum kits into fire; it can burst or explode.

Otherwise, dispose of it as nonflammable material.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-6

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Parts

Lower fixing roller

Separation claw (lower)

Fixing inlet guide

Delivery guide/ tray

Delivery spacer

every

20,000

Unit

Fixing

assembly

Delivery

assembly

every

60,000 Remarks

Use cleaning oil.

Use solvent.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10

TROUBLESHOOTING

I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION..10-3

A. Image Adjustment Basic

Procedure....................................10-3

B. Periodical Servicing.....................10-4

II. STANDARDS AND

ADJUSTMENTS...............................10-5

A. Image Adjustment .......................10-5

B. Exposure System ........................10-15

C. Image Formation System ............10-21

D. Pick-Up/Feeding System.............10-25

E. Fixing System..............................10-27

F. Electrical......................................10-35

III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE

FAULTS.............................................10-45

A. Initial Checks...............................10-45

B. Samples of Image Faults ...........10-48

C. Troubleshooting Image Faults .....10-49

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING

MALFUNCTIONS .............................10-63

A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions......10-63

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING

PROBLEMS......................................10-78

A. Jams (copy paper).......................10-78

B. Feeding Faults.............................10-81

VI. ARRANGEMENT/FUNCTIONS OF

THE ELECTRICAL PARTS...............10-82

A. Sensors .......................................10-82

B. Clutches, Solenoids, and

Switches ......................................10-84

C. Motors, Heaters, and Lamps.......10-86

D. PCBs ...........................................10-88

E. Cassette Feeding Module-A2......10-90

F. Variable Resistors (VR) and check

Pins by PCB ................................10-92

VII. SERVICE MODE ..............................10-94

A. Outline .........................................10-94

B. Using Service Mode....................10-94

C. Control Display Mode [1].............10-97

D. I/O Mode [2] ................................10-99

E. Adjustment Mode [3] ...................10-102

F. Operation/Inspection Mode [4] ....10-105

G. Specification Settings Mode [5]...10-107

H. Counter Mode [6] ........................10-108

VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS............................10-109

A. Copier..........................................10-109

B. Self Diagnosis (ADF)...................10-113

C. Self Diagnosis (Sorter)................10-114

This chapter provides tables of maintenance/inspection, standards/adjustments, and identification

(image fault/malfunction).

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-1

The troubleshooting procedures in this manual are prepared in the form of tables,

rather than flow charts. Study the following for an idea of how to consult the tables.

EX. AC power is absent.

■To find out the cause (faulty part) of a single problem, see the Cause/Fault column.

In the case of “AC power is absent,” you will learn that the power plug may not be

connected, the covers may not be closed properly, or the main power may be absent.

■To find out checks to make or remedies to provide for a single problem, see the

Remedy column as guided by YES/NO to the checks; or, move to the next step as

necessary.

■The instruction “Measure the voltage between J109-1 (+) and J109-2 (–) on the DC

controller PCB” asks you to connect the meter’s positive probe (+) to J109-1 and

negative probe to J109-2 (–).

Is the power

plug connected to

the outlet?

Connect the

plug

Checks YES/NO Remedies

Step

Are the front door

and delivery cover

closed properly?

Close the door

and cover.

Is the specified

voltage present at the

power outlet?

The problem is not

the copier’s: advise

the user.

YES

Guide to Troubleshooting Tables

Cause/Fault

Power plug

Covers

Main power

Step

YES/NO

YES

Checks

Is the power plug

connected to the outlet?

Are the front door and deliv-

ery cover closed properly?

Is the specified voltage

present at the power outlet?

Is the specified voltage pre-

sent between J1-1 and J1-

2? (J1 is located near the

power supply cord mount.)

Remedies

Connect the plug.

Close the door and cover.

The problem is not the

copier’s; advise the user.

Go to step 6.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-2

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-3

I MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

A. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure

B. Periodical Servicing

10-4

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

II. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Image Adjustment

1. Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin ([3], No. 305; registration ON timing)

Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 305’ (leading edge margin adjustment),

and make adjustments so that the image position is as indicated in Figure 10-201 when

the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.

Figure 10-201

Making Adjustments

1) Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 305’ using the keypad.

• The copy count indicator flashes ‘No. 305’.

2) Press the Start key.

3) Change the value using the keypad.

• The value flashes.

• If the value is negative, ‘%’ turns on. To enter a negative value, press the % key,

then enter the value using the keypad.

4) Press the AE key.

• The value flashes as soon as it is entered.

• Press the Start key to start copying operation.

5) To change a value continuously, repeat steps 1) through 4).

6) Press the Clear key to return to selecting items.

The relationship between the setting and the image position is as follows:

• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the position shifts about 0.27 mm.

• ‘+’ shifts the image forward.

10-5

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2.5±1.5mm

2. Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width ([3], No. 306; blank shutter ON

timing)

Activate [3] in service mode, select ‘No. 306’ (leading edge non-image width

adjustment), and make adjustments so that the image leading edge non-image width is

as indicated in Figure 10-202 when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.

The copier varies the image leading edge non-image width by varying the timing at

which the blank shutter is closed.

You must make this adjustment whenever you have replaced the blank shutter

solenoid or the blank exposure assembly.

Leading Edge Non-Image Width

Figure 10-202

Reference:

6 mm or less in Reduce/Enlarge mode.

Making Adjustments

1) Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 306’ using the keypad.

• The copy count indicator flashes ‘No. 306’.

2) Press the Start key.

3) Change the value using the keypad.

• The value flashes.

• If the value is negative, ‘%’ turns on. To enter a negative value, press the % key,

then enter the value using the keypad.

4) Press the AE key.

• The value flashes as soon as it is entered.

• Press the Start key to start copying operation.

5) To change a value continuously, repeat steps 1) through 4).

6) Press the Clear key to return to selecting items.

The relationship between the setting and the image position is as follows:

• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the position shifts about 0.27 mm.

• ‘+’ increases the non-image width.

10-6

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2.0±1.0mm

3. Adjusting the Image Trailing Edge Non-Image Width ([3], No. 309; blank shutter

timing)

Trailing Edge Non-Image Width

Figure 10-203

Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 309’ (leading edge non-image width

adjustment); make adjustments so that the image trailing edge non-image width is as

indicated in Figure 10-203 when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.

The copier varies the image trailing edge non-image width by varying the timing at

which the blank shutter is opened.

Making Adjustments

1) Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 309’ using the keypad.

• The copy count indicator flashes ‘No. 309’.

2) Press the Start key.

3) Change the value using the keypad.

• The value flashes.

• If the value is negative, ‘%’ turns on. To enter a negative value, press the % key,

then enter the value using the keypad.

4) Press the AE key.

• The value flashes as soon as it is entered.

• Press the Start key to start copying operation.

5) To change a value continuously, repeat steps 1) through 2).

6) Press the Clear key to return to selecting items.

The relationship between the setting and the image position is as follows:

• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the position shifts about 0.27 mm.

• ‘+’ decreases the trailing edge non-image width.

10-7

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2.5±

1.5mm

4. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration

Make adjustments so that the position of the image is as indicated in Figure 10-205

when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.

a. Pick-Up from the Cassette

Turn the screw 1 shown in Figure 10-204 to adjust the position of the cassette hook

plate.

standard: 0.±1.5 mm

clockwise turn: paper moves in the direction of – shown in Figure 10-205.

counterclockwise turn: paper moves in the direction of + in Figure 10-205.

Figure 10-204

Figure 10-205

b. Pick-Up from the Multifeeder

Loosen the screw 1, and move the position of the tray so that it is 0 ±1.5 mm.

Figure 10-206

10-8

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

(-) (+)

0±1.5mm

5. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (No. 311; left/right margin)

Select ‘No. 311’ (left/right margin adjustment); make adjustments so that the left/right

margin is 2.5 ±1.5 mm when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.

You must adjust the left/right registration before making this adjustment.

Making Adjustments

a. Margin (adjusting the width)

1) Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 311’ using the keypad.

2) Press the Start key.

3) Enter a value using the keypad.

• If the value is negative, ‘%’ turns on. To enter a negative value, press the % key,

then enter the value using the keypad.

The relationship between the setting and the image position is as follows:

• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the margin (one side) shifts about 0.37 mm.

• range: 0 to 15 mm

• ‘+’ increases the margin.

• ‘–’ decreases the margin.

Figure 10-207

b. Left/Right Margin

Turn the blank shutter adjustment screw located on the front side plate shown in

Figure 10-208 so that the value is as specified.

clockwise turn:moves the margin toward the front.

counterclockwise turn:moves the margin toward the rear.

a full turn: shifts the margin by about 1 mm.

Figure 10-208

10-9

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Shutter

Adjust the distance between the

two shutters in the blanking

assembly.

Figure 10-209

Caution:

After the adjustments (both a and b), turn on and off the power switch or change

the reproduction ratio so that the blank exposure assembly performs home

positioning.

6. Adjusting the Scanning Lamp Intensity

Turn VR301 on the DC controller as follows whenever you have replaced the

scanning lamp, intensity sensor, or DC controller.

1) Set Test Sheet NA3 on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.

2) Adjust the copy density (AE off) to electrical central position (service mode 1/0 mode

[2] No. 212 Value = 153~159).

❋ Without this adjustment, exposure value becomes invalid.

3) Turn VR301 on the DC controller so that the image is optimum.

• If the image is too light, turn the VR slightly clockwise.

• If the image is too dark, turn the VR slightly counterclockwise.

Reference:

1. The term optimum image refers to a copy whose gray scale No. 8 corresponds to

gray scale No. 4 through 7 of the Test Sheet without fogging.

2. An excessive turn on the VR could put out the lamp. If that is the case, turn it

clockwise until it stops, and turn off and then on the power for re-adjustment.

Caution:

Be sure to execute AE adjustment after these adjustments.

10-10

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Shutter

The entire shutters are

shifted.

7. AE Adjustment

Adjust the AE mechanism using the following three service modes:

qAE Basic Adjustment

No. 410 .............scanner forward stop

No. 408 ........scanning lamp on check

No. 208 .....AE sensor voltage display

No. 301lamp intensity automatic adjustment at time of AE scan

wCopy Density in AE Mode (No. 302)

(developing bias) reference adjustment

eCopy Density in AE Mode

(developing bias) slope adjustment

If the copy density is not optimum after executing AE basic adjustment q(No. 410,

No. 408, No. 208, No. 301), execute wand then , if necessary, e, i.e., No. 302 and No.

303.

If you have replaced the AE sensor, scanning lamp, or DC controller, adjust the

scanning lamp intensity (VR 301); then, execute AE basic adjustment q, scanner

forward stop (No. 410), scanning lamp on check (No. 408), AE sensor voltage display

(No. 208), and lamp intensity automatic adjustment (No. 301).

Go through the following when making adjustments; Table 10-1 is a list of service

modes excluding scanner forward stop (No. 410), list of service modes excluding

scanner forward stop (No. 410), scanning lamp on check (No. 408), and AE sensor

voltage display (No. 208).

a. AE Basic Adjustment (No. 410, No. 408, No. 208, No. 301)

In this adjustment, the intensity of the scanning lamp is read by the lamp intensity

sensor and the voltage of the AE sensor unit is adjusted by VR 391 on the DC controller.

After the adjustment, execute the lamp intensity automatic adjustment for AE scans.

1) Place the Test Sheet NA-3 on the copyboard, and close the copyboard.

Adjust to the appropriate copy density in non-AE mode (settings) by suing bias

adjustment knob “VR302”. Then press the service mode switch (SW302) to activate

service mode.

2) Enter ‘4’ using the keypad, and press the AE key.

• The display indicates ‘401’.

3) Enter ‘410’ using the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘410’.

4) Press the Start key once.

• The scanner moves forward.

Caution:

Each press moves the scanner forward; do not press more than once.

5) Enter ‘408’ using the keypad, and press the Start key.

• The display indicates ‘ON’, and turns off after about 1.5 sec.

6) Press the Clear key twice.

• The display indicates ‘4’.

7) Press ‘2’ on the keypad, and press the AE key.

• The display indicates ‘201’.

10-11

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8) Enter ‘208’ using the keypad, and press the start button.

• The display indicates ‘208’.

9) Press the Start key.

• The display indicates ‘0–255’.

10) Turn VR391 on the DC controller so that the reading on the display is ‘100~105’.

Figure 10-210 DC Controller PCB

11) Turn off and on the power switch.

• This turns off and on the scanning lamp.

12) Press the service mode switch.

• The copier enters service mode, and the display indicates ‘1’.

13) Enter ‘3’ using the keypad, and press the AE key.

• The display indicates ‘301’.

14) Press the Start key.

Caution:

Wait until initial rotation is over.

• After initial rotation is over, the AE indicators starts to flash.

15) Press the AE key; the following take place to indicate that the optimum intensity is

adjusted automatically:

• The AE indicator stops flashing and remains on.

• The scanner moves to the AE measurement position.

• When the intensity has stabilized, the reading taken by the AE sensor is stored in

memory.

• The lamp is turned off, and the scanner is returned to its original position.

16) When the above has ended, press the clear key twice.

• The display indicated ‘3’.

17) Enter ‘1’ using the keypad, and press the AE key.

• The display indicates ‘101’.

18) Enter ‘116’ using the keypad, and press the Start key.

• Make sure that the display indicates ‘68–72’; otherwise, start with step 2) of

operation/inspection mode for re-adjustment.

10-12

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

VR391

b. Copy Density (development bias) Reference Point Adjustment for AE Mode (No.

302)

1) If the indication is not in the 300’s, activate adjustment mode (service mode) as in the

case of ‘No. 301’.

2) Press [2] on the keypad.

• The copier indicates ‘302’.

3) Press the Start key.

• The copier indicates the current setting.

4) Change the setting using the keypad, and press the AE key.

• A higher setting causes the AE copies to be darker.

• default: 0

range: –26 to +26

• If the setting is negative, the ‘%’ is indicated. To enter a negative value, press the

‘%’ key, and enter a setting.

• When the copier has read the setting, the indication stops flashing and remains

on.

5) Record the new setting on the service mode label.

6) To end, press the Clear key.

• The copier returns to selection mode, and indicates ‘302’.

• As necessary, execute ‘No. 303’.

c. Copy Density (development bias) Slope Adjustment for AE Mode (No. 303)

1) If the indication is not in the 300’s, activate adjustment mode (service mode) as in the

case of No. 301.

2) Press [3] on the keypad.

• The copier indicates ‘303’.

3) Press the Start key.

• The copier indicates the current setting.

4) Change the setting with the keypad, and press the AE key.

• A larger setting causes the AE copies to be darker.

• default:.........................................0

range:...........................–26 to +26

• If the setting is negative, ‘%’ is indicated. To enter a negative value, press the ‘%’

key, and enter a setting.

• When the copier has read the setting, the indication stops flashing and remains

on.

5) Record the new settings on the service mode label.

6) Press the Reset key.

• The copier de-activates service mode.

10-13

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Table 10-201

10-14

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Function

Automatic lamp

intensity adjustment

for AE scans

Copy density

(development bias)

reference point

adjustment for AE

mode

Copy density

(development bias)

slope adjustment for

AE mode

Description

Lighter

Copy

density 5

Darker

Test Chart Density of

original

Remarks\

The lamp intensity

is automatically

adjusted so that the

copies of the Test

Chart will be made

at density 5.

qA lower setting in

service mode causes

the AE copies to be

darker.

wA higher settings

in service mode

causes the AE copies

to be lighter.

default: 0

range: –26 to +26

After adjustment with

the test sheet NA-3,

using AE mode,

density adjustment

should show ‘5

’.

In non-AE mode,

density ‘5’ must also

be apprppriate

(adjusted with knob

VR302).

qA higher setting

in service mode

causes copies of a

newspaper to be

lighter.

wA lower setting

in service mode

causes copies of a

newspaper to be

darker.

default: 0

range: –26 to +26

Item

No. 301

No. 302

No. 303

Test Chart Density of

original

Lighter

Copy

density 5

Darker

Test Chart Density of

original

Lighter

Copy

density 5

Darker

News-

paper

B. Exposure System

1. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable

Route the cable as shown by qthrough !0; then, adjust the cable tension and mirror

position as described.

Figure 10-211

Caution:

When attaching the wire spring, pay attention to the orientation of the spring; see

the diagrams below. If not attached correctly, its hook tip could interfere with the

cable.

Figure 10-212

10-15

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Screw

Loosen the

screw,and shift

it down.

Re-tighten

the screw.

Attach the mirror

positioning tool.

Set screws

Loosen the set

screws to enable

free rotation.

Put the steel ball

into the hole in

the pulley; wind

the cable nine

times toward the

inside, and four

times toward the

outside; then, snap

on the pulley clip.

Pulley clip

Steel ball

34±1mm

Wire spring

Hook Hook

Cable

2. Adjusting the Mirror Position (optical distance between No. 1 mirror and No.

2/No. 3 mirror)

1) Keep the mirror positioning tool handy.

(See “4 Assembling the Mirror Positioning Tool on P. 10-17.”)

2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount forward, and match the long hole in the front side plate

and the cable fixing screw q.

Figure 10-213

3) Loosen the set screw on the pulley.

4) Set the mirror positioning tool wto the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mirror mount

(both front and rear).

Figure 10-214

5) Attach the scanner cable fixing to the No. 1 mirror mount using two screws e(both

front and rear).

Figure 10-215

10-16

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

(front) (rear)

(front)

Mirror positioning tool (front) Mirror positioning tool (rear)

(front)

(front) (rear)

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-17

6) Tighten the screw on the pulley.

7) Detach the positioning tool (FY9-3009).

3. Adjusting the Scanner Cable Tension

Move the tension plate and tighten the screw wso that the distance across the ends

of the cable spring qis 34 ±1 mm as indicated in Figure 10-216.

Figure 10-216

4. Assembling the Mirror Positioning Tool

1) Remove the screw found in position B.

Figure 10-217

2) Fit the screw removed in step 1) in position A, and tighten it slightly.

3) Extend the arm accommodated by the main frame unit it butts against the stopper as

in Figure 10-218.

34±1mm

Position B

Longest pin

Medium-Length pin

4) Tighten the screw.

Figure 10-218

5. Points to Note When Attaching the Fluorescent Lamp Heater/Scanning Lamp

• Attach the heater to the lamp as follows:

Figure 10-219

Caution:

Do not touch the fluorescent lamp. (Use lint-free paper.)

Do not block the light-emitting portion by the fluorescent lamp heater.

10-18

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Position A

Light-

emitting

portion

Fluorescent

heater

1~5mm

60mm 60mm

Attach the scanning lamp so that its light-emitting portion (open side) is to the left

when viewed from the front of the copier as shown in Figure 10-220.

Figure 10-220 (front view)

Caution:

Do not touch the fluorescent lamp. (Use rint-free paper)

Be sure to adjust the gain and AE whenever you have replaced the fluorescent

lamp. (See P. 10-11.)

• Make sure that the cut-off of the fluorescent heater is correctly oriented in relation

to the intensity adjustment sensor.

Figure 10-221

Reference:

The fluorescent lamp heater will not operate unless the copier’s heater switch is

turned on.

10-19

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Light-emitting portion

Light adjustment sensor

Fluorescent lamp heater

6. Positioning the Change Solenoid

Make adjustments by loosening the two screws tso that the gear rbutts against

the direction of b by the arm ewhen the steel core qof the solenoid is fully pushed in

the direction of B, i.e., when the E-ring comes into contact with the solenoid.

Figure 10-222

10-20

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

rAB

C. Image Formation System

1. Positioning the Blank Shutter Solenoid

Adjust the position of the blank shutter solenoid so that the bottom A is 9.5 ±0.5 mm

on both sides when the solenoid is moved in the direction of ON; try not to force down

the shutter.

After adjustments, make sure that the solenoid moves smoothly.

Figure 10-223a

Figure 10-223b

10-21

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2. Routing the Blank Shutter Cable

Figure 10-224

3. Positioning the Solenoid for the Primary Charging Roller

Loosen the two screws used to fix the solenoid ein place, and move the solenoid in

the direction of B so that the

Rin Figure 10-225 is 5.5 ±0.2 mm when the joint qis

butted against a of the solenoid support plate w.

Caution:

Be sure to make the adjustment whenever you have replaced the solenoid.

Figure 10-225

10-22

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Attach the spring to

the outside of the

sides shutter.

Slide shutter (rear)

Wind 3.5 times.

Slide shutter (front)

= 5.5 ± 0.2

4. After Replacing the Drum Unit

Whenever you have replaced the drum unit, enter the date of replacement and the

current counter reading on the label (Figure 10-226) that came with the drum unit; attach

the label to the front cover of the new drum unit, and perform the image basic adjustment

procedure.

Figure 10-226

5. Attaching the Drum Heater

1) Detach the front cover.

2) Open the copier’s top body by operating the copier open/close lever.

3) Remove the two fixing screws w, and detach the harness cover q.

Figure 10-227

4) Detach the transfer roller and the static eliminator.

5) Detach the transfer guide.

6) Butt the two heaters against the transfer guide as shown in Figure 10-228, and fix the

two mounts with two screws e; further, fix the harness in place using two harness

bands r(front, rear).

Figure 10-228

10-23

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7) Fix the harness in place using two SK binders (WT2-5145; front, rear) t; then, insert

it into the transfer guide.

Caution:

When fixing the harness in place, make sure that the cap portions of the terminals

alternate; keeping them in parallel will bring them in contact with the transfer roller.

8) Fix the harness with two SK binder t(front, rear) in place, and insert it into the

transfer guide.

Figure 10-229

9) Connect the connector yas shown in Figure 10-230.

Figure 10-230

Caution:

When attaching the transfer guide to the copier after attaching the drum heater,

make sure that the spring at the rear is firmly in the groove.

10-24

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

D. Pick-Up/Feeding System

1. Orientation of the Pick-Up Roller

Attach the pick-up roll qso that the side wshown in Figure 10-231 is toward the

rear.

Figure 10-231

2. Orientation of the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller

Attach the multifeeder pick-up roller qso that the side with the collar with a cross w

is toward the rear.

Figure 10-232

10-25

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

(front)

3. Positioning the Paper Guide Plate Cam (multifeeder)

Temporarily fix the screw with a hex nut of the spring clutch assembly in place; turn

the control ring. Make adjustments so that the hole in the cam and the hole in the

multifeeder drive unit match as indicated in Figure 10-233 when the claw of the control

ring is engaged with the solenoid; then, fix in place.

Figure 10-233

10-26

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

E. Fixing System

1. Points to Note When Attaching the Fixing Film

Orient it so that the cut-off is toward the rear.

Make sure that the end toward the front is along the middle groove.

Figure 10-234

2. Points to Note When Attaching the Heater Connector

• When attaching the heater connector to the fixing heater, take care not to damage

the heater.

• When tightening the screw, hold the connector making sure that both its top and

bottom are free of pressure; do not tighten the screw excessively.

Figure 10-235

10-27

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Film end aligned.

Screw

Heater connector

3. Adjusting the Fixing Film Drive Roller Pressure

If a fixing fault occurs, be sure to go through the following to adjust the pressure of

the drive roller.

1) Detach the fixing cover.

2) Detach the inside cover of the copier’s front side.

3) Close the copier’s upper body, and insert the door switch actuator.

4) Press the service mode switch (SW302).

• The copier enters service mode, and the display indicates ‘1’.

5) Press ‘4’ on the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘4’.

6) Press the AE key.

• The copier enters operation check mode, and the display indicates ‘401’.

7) Press ‘5’ on the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘405’.

8) Press the Start key.

• The copier enters fixing film initial rotation mode (405) to return the fixing film to

its proper position.

• The fixing film stops automatically as soon as it reaches its proper position.

• The copier indicates the position of the film in the copy density indicator.

9) Open the copier’s top body.

10) Check that the arrow qis at the middle of the memory as shown in Figure 10-236.

Figure 10-236 (rear view)

11) Close the copier’s top body, and activate service mode.

12) Press ‘4’ on keypad; when the display indicates ‘4’, press the AE key.

13) Press ‘4’ on the keypad; when the display indicates ‘404’, press the Start key.

• The copier enters fixing tension roller mode (404).

• The fixing tension roller becomes fixed, and the fixing film rotates idly.

• The count indicator indicates how long the fixing film sensor has remained on.

Caution:

If the copy count indicator keeps indicating ‘0’ or ‘528’ during adjustment,

immediately press the Stop key to de-activate service mode.

10-28

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

If the copy countis ‘180’ or higher and ‘348’ or lower and has not changed, go to step

17). Or, if 10’s and 100’s do not change, go to step 17);

14) Loosen the fixing screw wslightly; i.e., move it to the left about 1 mm.

15) Turn the adjusting screw eso that the copy count is ‘180’ or higher’ and ‘348’ or

lower.

Caution:

Adjust so that 10’s and 100’s will not change; ignore 1’s may change ±5.)

• A clockwise turn decreases the reading.

• A counterclockwise turn increases the reading.

Figure 10-237

16) When the reading in the copy counter is appropriately correct, tighten the screw w;

make sure that the reading is appropriate after tightening the screw.

17) Press the Start key.

• The copier enters check mode (404), and the fixing film rotates idly for about 2.5

min; check that the fixing film has not shifted from the adjusted position.

• The copy count indicator indicates “ ” or “ ”; if “ ” is indicated, repeat steps

starting with 13).

If “ ” is indicated, repeat steps 4) through 10).

18) Attach the cover.

4. Points to Note after Replacing the Fixing Upper Unit

You must enter the resistance of the heater by selecting ‘No. 304’ in service mode

whenever you have replaced the fixing upper unit. (See p. 10-31.)

10-29

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5. Adjusting the Nip

The nip should be as indicated in Figure 10-238. You must make the following

adjustments if fixing faults occur.

Figure 10-238

Note:

a and c represent points 10 cm from both edges of the copy.

a. Measuring the Nip

Measure the nip before starting the day’s work; for example, first thing in the morning.

1) Open the copyboard cover, and make a solid black copy in A4.

2) Place the copy in the multifeeder with the solid black face up.

3) Press the service mode switch (SW302) using a hex key.

• The copier enters service mode, and indicates ‘1’.

4) Press [4] on the keypad.

• The copier indicates ‘4’.

5) Press the AE key.

• The copier enters operation/inspection mode, and indicates ‘401’.

6) Press [6] on the keypad.

• The copier indicates ‘406’.

7) Press the Start key.

• The multifeeder picks up paper, and the copier positions the paper as in Figure

10-238 for measurement, and dischages it.

Reference:

The fixing rollers hold the paper and stop it when half of it has been delivered; the

paper is discharged automatically about 10 sec later.

8) Measure the nip.

10-30

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

paper

Feeding

direction b

b : 4

-1mm

+2mm

a-c : 1mm or less

Center of copy

paper

10-31

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6. Routing the Drive Belt

Route the drive belt around the pulley and tensioner as shown in Figure 10-239.

Figure 10-239

7. Storing the Fixing Heater Resistance

You must store the resistance of the fixing heater as follows whenever you are

replacing the fixing upper unit; do not change the setting unless you have replaced the

heater.

1) Take notes of the resistance (ohm) of the fixing heater recorded on the rear side plate

of the fixing upper unit.

2) Attach the fixing upper unit to the copier.

3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch.

4) Press the service mode switch (SW302) with a hex key.

• The copier activates service mode, and indicates ‘1’.

5) Press [3] on the keypad.

• The copier activates adjustment mode, and indicates ‘3’.

6) Press the AE key.

• The copier enters adjustment mode, and indicates ‘301’.

7) Press [0] and [4] on the keypad.

• The copier indicates ‘304’.

8) Press the Start key.

• The copier indicates the current setting.

9) Enter the measured reading, and press the AE key to store.

10) Record the new setting on the service mode label.

11) Press the Reset key.

• The copier de-activates service mode.

unit: ohms; enter a value which is the result of the measured resistance multiplied

by 10.

range (default)

220/240V: ..........235 to 325 (280)

Reference:

1. If the measured resistance is 9.5 ohms, enter ‘095’; if 28 ohms, enter ‘280’.

2. The power supplied to the fixing heater is phase-controlled based on the voltage of

the power supply and the resistance being stored.

8. Setting the Fixing Heater Temperature Control Value

You can change the fixing temperature control value in the field in any of the following

two ways:

8-1 When Replacing the Fixing Upper Unit

Set the initial control temperature value for the 1st to 4th copies under No. 508 of

service mode for when the temperature of the fixing heater is less than 120°C at time

copying is started.

1) Take notes of the value recorded on the label on the fixing upper unit heater stay

(rear).

Figure 10-240 Heater Stay Side Plate (rear)

10-32

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Label

3-digit resistance to be entered in

service mode No. 304

Fixing temperature control value

to be entered in service mode No.508

Label location

123

2) Replace the fixing upper unit.

3) Press the service switch (SW302).

• The copier enters service mode and indicates ‘1’.

4) Enter ‘5’ using the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘5’.

5) Press the AE key, and enter ‘8’ on the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘508’.

6) Press the Start key.

• The display indicates ‘001’, ‘002’, or ‘003’.

7) Enter the control value you have recorded in step 1) using the keypad.

Example:

If the value recorded on the heater stay (rear) of the fixing upper unit is ‘2’,

a.Enter ‘2’ using the keypad to change the value.

b.Press the AE key.

c.Press the Reset key.

Caution:

You must set the resistance of the heater also when replacing the fixing upper unit.

8-2 When Replacing the Fixing Film

1) Replace the fixing film.

2) Replace the copy paper in the cassette with A3 size copy paper.

3) Press the service switch (SW302).

• The copier enters service mode and indicates ‘1’.

4) Enter ‘5’ using the keypad, and press the AE key.

• The display indicates ‘501’.

5) Enter ‘5’ using the keypad, and press the Start key.

• The display indicates ‘001’, ‘002’, or ‘003’.

6) Enter ‘2’ using the keypad, and press the Clear key.

8) Make 20 copies or more in A3 to warm up the entire fixing upper unit.

9) Place the Test Chart NA-3 on the copyboard, and put a blank sheet of paper (A3) to

cover about 2/3 of the Test Chart (bottom).

Figure 10-241

10-33

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Blank

sheet of

paper

(A3)

Test Chart

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-34

10) Enter ‘4’ using the keypad, and set the copy count.

11) Press the service switch (SW302), thereby recalling the temperature of the No. 1

thermistor.

• The display indicates ‘1’.

12) Press the AE key, and enter ‘9’ on the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘109’.

13) Press the Start key.

• Make 4 copies in A3.

14) When copying is finished, take note of the temperature reading in the display. Press

the Start key once again when the reading is 116°–118°C.

• Make four copies in A3.

15) Check if offset has occurred.

• If offset is noted, change the temperature control value of the fixing heater. Go to

step 16).

• If offset is not noted, go to step 21).

16) Press the Clear key, and enter ‘5’ using the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘508’.

17) Press the AE key, and enter ‘8’ using the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘508’.

18) Press the Start key.

• The display indicates ‘002’.

19) Enter ‘3’ using the keypad.

• The display indicates ‘003’.

20) Press the AE key.

• The setting is changed.

21) Press the Reset key.

• The copier leaves service mode.

F. Electrical

1. After Replacing the PCB

You must make the adjustments that follow whenever you have replaced the following

PCBs.

a. DC Controller PCB

1) Enter the value recorded on the service mode label attached behind the front door in

service mode (‘3’; see p. 10-102).

2) Adjust the multifeeder paper width sensor; see p. 10-43.

3) Adjust the intensity of the scanning lamp; see p. 10-10.

4) Adjust AE; see p. 10-11.

As necessary, change the settings in service mode and user mode.

Caution:

Be sure to record all new settings that you have entered.

b. Composite Power Supply PCB

1) Enter the values recorded on the label attached to the composite power supply in

service mode (‘No. 315’ through ‘No. 318’; ‘3’ of adjustment mode); see p. 10-103.

Be sure to record any new settings on the service mode label.

c. AE Sensor PCB

1) Adjust AE; see p. 10-11.

Caution:

Be sure to record all new settings that you have entered.

d. Intensity Sensor PCB

1) Adjust the intensity of the scanner lamp; see p. 10-10.

2) Adjust AE; see p. 10-11.

Caution:

Be sure to record all new settings that you have entered.

2. Clearing the Back-Up RAM

1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch activator into the door switch.

2) Press the service mode switch (SW302) with a hex key.

• The copier activates service mode, and indicates ‘1’.

3) Press [4] on the keypad.

• The copier indicates ‘4’.

4) Press the AE key.

• The copier activates operation/inspection mode, and indicates ‘401’.

5) Press [5] and [0] on the keypad.

• The copier indicates ‘450’.

6) Press the Start key.

• The copier indicates ‘noP’.

10-35

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7) Press the AE key.

• The indication changes to ‘EE’.

8) Press the Start key.

• The indication returns to ‘450’.

9) Turn off and on the power switch.

• The copier clears the backup RAM, and returns the default settings.

Reference:

To cancel RAM clearing, press the Clear key and then the Reset key. To cancel it

after having finished step 8), press the Start key once again; when ‘noP’ is

indicated, press the Start key once again.

3. Checking the Photointerrupters

The copier allows checking the photointerrupters with a conventional meter or in

service mode.

a. Using a Meter

1) Set the meter to the 12VDC range.

2) Connect the (–) probe of the meter to J301-4 (GND) on the DC controller.

3) Make checks as indicated.

1: 5V

0: 0V

Reference:

All photointerrupters except PS1, PS2, PS3, PS6, and PS9 are connected in the

form of a matrix, and for this reason may show variations if checked by a meter; use

service mode for these photointerrupters.

b. Using Service Mode

1) Open the front door, and insert a door switch actuator into the door switch.

2) Press the service mode switch (SW302) with a hex key.

3) Press [2] on the keypad.

• The copier indicates ‘2’.

4) Press the AE key.

• The copier activates I/O display mode, and indicates ‘201’.

5) Enter a number with the keypad, and press the Start key.

• The copier checks each photointerrupter; see the copy count indicator.

Figure 10-242

10-36

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-a 1-a

2-f 2-b

2-g

2-e 2-c

2-d

1-f

1-g

1-b

1-e

1-d

1-c

a. Copier

Name

PS1

Scanner home

position sensor

(SCHP)

PS2

Lens home

reposition

sensor (LHP)

PS3

Blank shutter

home position

sensor (BSHP)

PS4

Cassette paper

sensor (CPD*)

PS5

Multifeeder

paper sensor

(MFPD*)

PS6

Registration

sensor (RPD)

PS7

Separation

sensor (SPD*)

+ probe

Service mode

J311-2

—

J307-2

No. 205 1-c

J315-2

No. 205 1-d

J313-9

No. 205 1-c

J313-3

No. 204 1-d

J314-2

No. 205 1-a

J314-6

No. 204 1-b

Move the

scanner by

hand while

in standby.

Move the

lens mount

by hand while

in standby.

Detach the

blank expo-

sure assem-

bly; do not

disconnect

J315. Move

the blank

shutter.

Slide out

the cassette

while in

standby.

Place paper

on the

multifeeder

tray while in

standby.

Open the

right door

while in

standby, and

insert paper

along the

paper guide

plate.

Move the

detection

lever with a

finger while

in standby.

Checks

The scanner is at

home position.

The scanner is not

at home reposition.

The light-blocking

plate is present.

The light-blocking

plate is not present.

The light-blocking

plate is present.

The light-blocking

plate is not present.

The cassette is slid

out.

The cassette with

paper is slid in.

Paper is placed.

Paper is not placed.

Paper is inserted.

Paper is not

inserted.

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

Display

indication

Voltage

reading

on meter

—

10-37

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-38

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Name

PS8

Delivery sensor

(DSPD*)

PS9

Fixing film

sensor (FFD)

PS10

Right door

open/closed

sensor (RDOP*)

Q651

Cassette size

sensor 1 (CSZ-1)

Q652

Cassette size

sensor 2 (CSZ-2)

Q653

Cassette size

sensor 3 (CSZ-3)

+ probe

Service mode

J312-2

No. 204 1-g

J304-12

No. 205 1-e

J306-15

No. 204 1-a

J314-8

No. 203 1-e

J314-9

No. 203 1-f

J314-10

No. 203 1-g

Move the

detection

lever with a

finger while

in standby.

Move the

detection

lever with a

finger while

in standby

Open the

right door

while in

standby

Slide out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detection

lever with a

finger.

Slide out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detection

lever with a

finger

Slide out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detection

lever with a

finger.

Checks

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

The light-blocking

plate is present.

The light-blocking

plate is not present.

The right door is

open.

The right door is

closed.

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

Display

indication

Voltage

reading

on meter

—

b. Cassette Feeding Unit

10-39

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Name

Q654

Cassette size

sensor 4 (CSZ-4)

+ probe

Service mode

J314-11

No. 203 2-a

Slide out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detection

lever with a

finger.

Checks

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

Display

indication

Voltage

reading

on meter

—

Name

PS1cu

Cassette 2

vertical path

sensor (C2VPD)

PS2cu

Cassette 2

paper sensor

(C2PD*)

Q651-2

Cassette 2 size

sensor 1 (C2SZ-

+ probe

Service mode

J319-A2

No. 204 2-b

J319-A4

No. 204 1-e

J319-B1

No. 201 1-e

Draw out the

cassette 2

while in

standby, and

put copy

paper over

the pick-up

guide plate.

Draw out

the cassette

2 while in

standby.

Draw out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detecting

lever by a fin-

ger; be sure

to set paper

selection to

cassette 2.

Checks

Copy paper is

inserted.

Copy paper is not

inserted.

The cassette is

drawn out.

The cassette is put

back with paper in

it.

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

Display

indication

Voltage

reading

on meter

—

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-40

Name

Q652-2

Cassette 2 size

sensor 2 (C2SZ-

Q653-2

Cassette 2 size

sensor 3 (C2SZ-

Q654-2

Cassette 2 size

sensor 4 (C2SZ-

PS3cu

Cassette 3

vertical path

sensor (C3VPD)

+ probe

Service mode

J319-B2

No. 201 1-f

J319-B3

No. 201 1-g

J319-B4

No. 201 2-a

J319-A7

No. 203 1-b

Draw out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detecting

lever by a fin-

ger; be sure

to set paper

selection to

cassette 2.

Draw out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detecting

lever by a fin-

ger; be sure

to set paper

selection to

cassette 2.

Draw out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detecting

lever by a fin-

ger; be sure

to set paper

selection to

cassette 2.

Draw out the

cassette 3

while in

standby, and

put copy

paper over

the pick-up

guide plate.

Checks

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

Copy paper is

placed.

Copy paper is not

placed.

Display

indication

Voltage

reading

on meter

—

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-41

Name

PS4cu

Cassette 3

paper sensor

(C3PD*)

Q651-3

Cassette 3 size

sensor 1 (C3SZ-

Q652-3

Cassette 3 size

sensor 2 (C3SZ-

Q653-3

Cassette 3 size

sensor 3 (C3SZ-

+ probe

Service mode

J319-A9

No. 203 1-f

J319-B1

No. 202 1-e

J319-B2

No. 202 1-f

J319-B3

No. 202 1-g

Draw out

the cassette

3 while in

standby.

Draw out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detecting

lever by a fin-

ger; be sure

to set paper

selection to

cassette 3.

Draw out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detecting

lever by a fin-

ger; be sure

to set paper

selection to

cassette 3.

Draw out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detecting

lever by a fin-

ger; be sure

to set paper

selection to

cassette 3.

Checks

The cassette is

drawn out.

The cassette is

inserted with paper

in it.

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

Display

indication

Voltage

reading

on meter

—

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-42

Name

Q654-4

Cassette 3 size

sensor 4 (C3SZ-

PS5cu

Cassette right

door

open/closed

sensor

(CRDOP*)

+ probe

Service mode

J319-B4

No. 202 2-a

J319-A6

No. 204 2-a

Draw out the

cassette

while in

standby, and

move the

detecting

lever by a fin-

ger; be sure

to set paper

selection to

cassette 3.

Open the

right door

while in

standby.

Checks

The lever is moved.

When the lever is

not moved.

The lever is moved.

The lever is not

moved.

Display

indication

Voltage

reading

on meter

—

4. Adjusting the Multifeeder Paper Width Sensor

Store the characteristic of the multifeeder paper width sensor in service mode (501).

Perform the adjustment when you have replaced the sensor if the sensor fails to

identify the paper size correctly.

1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch.

2) Press the service mode switch (SW302) with a hex key.

• The copier activates service mode, and indicates ‘1’.

3) Press [5] on the keypad.

• The copier indicates ‘5’.

4) Press the AE key.

• The copier activate specification settings mode, and indicates ‘501’.

5) Press the Start key.

• The copier indicates ‘A3’.

6) A press on the keypad changes the indication as shown in Table 10-201. Select the

size of paper to change. (Do not select CLR.)

• The indication will start to flash if you select a size which has not been stored.

• If you press the Start key when ‘CLR’ is indicated, the copier clears all stored settings

and returns the default settings.

7) Shift the guide on the multifeeder to suit the size to be stored.

• Be sure to hear a click.

8) Press the AE key.

• When the setting is stored, the indication stops flashing and remains on.

9) Press the Reset key.

• The copier de-activates service mode.

Table 10-201

Reference:

1. When storing JPC (No. 9), adjust the guide width to the smallest width.

2. At time of shipment, the settings are A3, A4R, and JPC; the copier retains the

characteristics curves of the corresponding three points and uses them when

identifying the size of paper during copying operation. When you store a size other

than these three, the copier takes the new settings into account when making

computations; for this reason, it is best to store sizes that the user tends to use most

frequently.

10-43

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Remarks

Ledger

Legal

A4R

B5R

A5R

Statement R

Postcard

(100 mm wide)

Clear (Clears settings)

Key

Indication

Ldr

LGL

A4r

b5r

A5r

JPC

CLr

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-44

5. Setting the Paper Size for the Universal Cassette

If the paper size lever for the cassette is at the universal cassette, set the appropriate

paper size in service mode (505).

1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch.

2) Press the service mode switch (SW302) with a hex key.

• The copier activates service mode, and indicates ‘1’.

3) Press [5] on the keypad.

• The copier indicates ‘5’.

4) Press the AE key.

• The copier enters machine settings mode, and indicates ‘501’.

5) Press [0] and [5] on the keypad.

• The copier indicates ‘505’.

6) Press the Start key.

• The copier indicates the current setting for the universal cassette.

7) Select the size to store using the keypad according to Table 10-202.

8) Press the AE key to store the new setting.

9) Press the Reset key.

• The copier de-activates service mode.

Table 10-202

Size

355.0 x 216.0

340.0 x 220.0

337.0 x 206.0

330.2 x 215.9

330.0 x 210.0

330.2 x 203.2

320.0 x 220.0

317.0 x 216.0

280.0 x 220.0

268.0 x 190.0

266.7 x 203.2

220.0 x 280.0

203.2 x 266.7

190.0 x 268.0

Keypad

Paper

Bolivian

OFFICIO

Argentine

OFFICIO

Argentine

LEGAL

Australian

FOOLSCAP

FOLIO

Government

LEGAL

Ecuadorian

OFFICIO

Argentine

LTTER-R

Korean

Government-R

Government

LETTER-R

Argentine

LETTER

Government

LETTER

Korean

Government

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-45

III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS

A. Initial Checks

1. Site Environment

a. Make sure that the power supply is as specified (±10%).

b. Avoid high temperature/humidity conditions; near water faucets, water boilers, and

humidifiers. Avoid areas subject to excessively low temperature, sources of fire, and

dust.

c. Avoid areas subject to ammonium gas.

d. Avoid areas subject to direct rays of the sun; otherwise, instruct the user to provide

curtains.

e. Make sure the room is well ventilated.

f. Make sure that the floor will keep the machine level.

Check the site to see if it complies with the above requirements.

2. Checking the Originals

Identify the problem as to whether it is caused by the machine or the original used.

a. Originals with a reddish tinge result in copies with poor contrast; for example, red

sheets and slips.

Reference:

The operation of the following heaters may be controlled by the user by changing

the respective settings; at time of shipment, the settings are at OFF—this means

the copier may remain connected or disconnected at night. If the use of any of the

heaters proves to be necessary because of unique site conditions, the copier

should remain powered at night without disconnecting its power plug.

• fluorescent lamp heater (accessory)

• lens mount heater

• No. 2 mirror mount heater

b. Diazo copies or originals with high transparency can result in copies that can be

mistaken for foggy copies. Originals prepared in pencil can result in copies that can

be mistaken for light copies.

3. Checking the Copyboard Cover and the Copyboard Glass

Check the copyboard cover and the copyboard glass for dirt; if soiled, clean them using

a solution of mild detergent or alcohol; if scratched, replace them.

4. Checking the Paper

a. Check if the paper is Canon-recommended paper.

b. Check if the paper is dry; try paper fresh out of the package.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5. Others

Moving a machine which has been cooled in a storage room or the like in winter to

a warm room can lead to condensation inside the machine, causing various problems;

for instance,

a. condensation on the scanning system (glass, mirror, lens) leads to light images.

b. condensation in the charging system leads to electrical leakage.

c. condensation on the pick-up/feeding guide leads to feeding problems.

If condensation is noted, dry wipe the part or leave the machine alone powered for

60 min.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-46

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-47

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. SAMPLES OF IMAGE FAULTS

not available

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-48

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Troubleshooting Faulty Images

1. The copy is too light (half-tone only).

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-49

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cause

AE mechanism

Developing

assembly

Scanner

Drum cartridge

Checks

Perform the Basic Image

Adjustment Procedure. Is the

problem corrected?

Make copies in AE mode. Is the

density too low, i.e., is the copy

too light?

Is the developing cylinder coated

with a uniform layer of toner?

Clean the mirror, lens, and dust-

proofing glass. Is the problem

corrected?

Step

Results

YES

Action

End.

Perform AE adjustment.

Replace the developing

assembly.

End.

Replace the drum

cartridge.

2. The copy is too light (black solid also).

3. The copy is too light (overall, extremely).

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-50

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Perform the Image Basic

Adjustment Procedure. Is the

problem corrected?

Turn off the power switch during

copying operation, and open the

front door. Is the toner image on

the photosensitive drum before

transfer more or less normal?

Is the transfer charging roller

securely inserted?

Is electrical leakage noted on the

transfer charging roller?

Is dirt, crack, or scratch noted on

the transfer charging roller?

Are the position and condition of

the pressure spring of the transfer

charging roller normal?

Try fresh copy paper. Is the

problem corrected?

Set the feeding assembly in

feeding position, and measure the

resistance between the lower

transfer guide and the base

(metal) of the transfer charging

assembly rail. Is the resistance 0

Ω?

Cause

Transfer

charging

roller

Copy paper

Lower trans-

fer guide

High-voltage

cord, high-

voltage

transformer,

DC con-

troller PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

End.

Go to step 7.

Re-insert the transfer

charging roller.

Check the transfer

charging roller.

Replace the transfer

charging roller.

Correct or replace the

spring.

1. The paper may be

moist; advise the

user on the correct

way of storing paper

2. Advise the user that

the use of paper not

of a type

recommended by

Canon may produce

images falling short

of expectations.

Check if the lower

transfer guide is in

contact with a metal

portion (e.g., side plate

of the feeding assembly).

1. Check the electrical

continuity of the high-

voltage cord.

2. Check the high-

voltage transformer

and the DC controller

PCB.

Transfer

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-51

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Take out the developing assembly,

and shake it. Is the problem

corrected?

Is the reading in service mode

(105; primary current) 10 µA or

less?

Cause

Toner level,

toner level

detection

mechanism

Composite

power supply

PCB

Drum cartridge

Step

Results

YES

Action

The level of toner may

be too low or the toner

level detection

mechanism may be

faulty; advise the user to

replace the toner

cartridge.

Replace the composite

power supply PCB.

Replace the toner

cartridge.

Transfer

4. The copy has uneven density (front too dark).

5. The copy has uneven density (front too light).

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-52

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Clean the scanning lamp, reflect-

ing plate, side reflecting plate,

mirror, lens, and dust-proofing

glass. Is the problem corrected?

Execute ‘No. 402’ in service mode

(primary charging roller cleaning).

Is the problem corrected?

Execute ‘No. 403’ in service mode

(transfer roller cleaning). Is the

problem corrected?

Make several blank (white) copies.

Is the problem corrected?

Is the transfer changing roller

securely inserted?

Are the position and condition of

the pressure spring of the transfer

charging roller normal?

Does the pre-exposure lamp turn

on during copying operation?

Is the developing cylinder coated

with a uniform layer of toner?

Cause

Scanner

Primary

charging roller

Transfer charg-

ing assembly

Pre-exposure

lamp

Developing

assembly

Step

Results

YES

Action

End.

Re-insert the charging

roller.

Corrector replace the

spring.

See “The pre-exposure

lamp fails to turn on.”

Take out the developing

assembly, and shake it

several times; then,

make copies. If the

problem is not corrected,

replace the developing

assembly.

6. The copy is foggy (overall).

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-53

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Perform the Basic Image

Adjustment Procedure. Is the

problem corrected?

Clean the scanning lamp, reflect-

ing plate, side reflecting plate,

mirror, lens, and dust-proofing

glass. Is the problem corrected?

Does the pre-exposure lamp turn

on during copying operation?

Is the developing spacer worn?

Is the developing cylinder worn?

Is the developing cylinder

insulated from the copier GND?

Turn off the power supply, and

disconnect J908. Check the

continuity with the meter between

the developing and copier sides of

J908-2.

Is the reading for ‘No. 105’ in

service mode (primary charging

current) 10 µA or less?

Cause

Scanner

Pre-exposure

lamp, DC

controller PCB

Developing

spacer

Developing

cylinder

Developing

cylinder

Drum cartridge

Composite

power supply

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

End.

See “The pre-exposure

lamp fails to turn on.”

Replace the developing

assembly.

Replace the developing

assembly.

Check the parts around

the developing cylinder

and the developing

connector.

Replace the drum

cartridge.

Replace the composite

power supply PCB.

7. The copy is foggy (vertical).

8. The copy has black lines (vertical; thick fuzzy lines).

9. The copy has black lines (vertical, fine).

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-54

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Perform the Image Adjustment

Basic Procedure. Is the problem

corrected?

Execute ‘No. 402’ in service mode

(primary charging roller cleaning).

Is the problem corrected?

Clean the scanning lamp, reflect-

ing plate, side reflecting plate,

lens, mirror, and dust-proofing

glass. Is the problem corrected?

Clean the pre-exposure lamp. Is

the problem corrected?

Is the developing cylinder coated

with a uniform layer of toner?

Cause

Primary

charging roller

Scanner

Pre-exposure

lamp

Developing

assembly

Fixing

assembly

Step

Results

YES

Action

End.

Replace the developing

assembly.

Check and clean the

fixing assembly.

Checks

Make a copy, and turn off the

power switch while the paper is in

the feeding assembly. Are black

lines noted on the copy before it

moves through the fixing

assembly?

Is the transfer guide soiled (in par-

ticular, the upper transfer guide) ?

Are scratches or black lines noted

around the photosensitive drum?

Try wiping the photosensitive

drum with a flannel cloth coated

with toner. Do the lines disap

pear?

Are there scratches or black lines

on the upper fixing film?

Cause

Transfer guide

Photosensitive

drum

Exposure

system

Fixing

assembly

Step

Results

YES

Action

Go to step 3.

End.

Replace the drum

cartridge. If scratches

are found, investigate

the cause.

Check the exposure

system.

Replace the upper fixing

unit.

Check the inlet of the

fixing assembly for dirt.

10. The copy has white spot (vertical).

11. The copy has white lines (vertical).

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-55

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Make a copy with the copyboard

cover lifted, and turn off the power

switch while the paper is moving

through the feeding assembly. Are

white spots or liens noted on the

copy before it moves through the

fixing assembly?

Execute ‘No. 402’ in service mode

(primary charging roller cleaning).

Is the problem corrected?

Execute ‘No. 409’ in service mode

(transfer roller cleaning). Is the

problem corrected?

Is dirt, cracks, or scratches noted

on the transfer charging roller?

Are the position and condition of

the transfer charging roller

pressure spring normal?

Clean the static eliminator. Is the

problem corrected?

Is the developing cylinder coated

with a uniform layer of toner?

Try fresh copy paper. Is the

problem corrected?

Are there scratches around the

photosensitive drum?

Cause

Fixing

assembly

Primary

charging roller

Transfer

charging roller

Static

eliminator

Developing

assembly

Copy paper

Photosensitive

drum

Light from

outside

Step

Results

YES

Action

1. Clean the inlet guide

(upper, lower) of the

fixing assembly.

2. Check the upper

fixing unit.

End.

Replace the transfer

charging roller.

Correct or replace the

spring.

End.

Take out the developing

assembly, and shake it

several times. If the

problem is not corrected,

replace the developing

assembly.

The copy paper may be

moist; advise the user

on the correct method of

storing paper.

Replace the drum

cartridge. (Be sure to

investigate the cause of

the scratches.)

Check if the photosensi-

tive drum is exposed to

light from outside.

12. The copy has white spots (horizontal).

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-56

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Take out the developing assembly,

and shake it several times. Is the

problem corrected?

Is the problem noted at intervals

of about 9.4 cm (scratches in the

photosensitive drum)?

Is the problem noted at intervals

of about 5.1 cm?

Execute ‘No. 402’ in service mode

(primary charging roller cleaning).

Is the problem corrected?

Execute ‘No. 403’ (transfer roller

cleaning) in service mode. Is the

problem corrected?

Is the problem noted at intervals

of about 5.1 cm?

Is dirt, cracks, or scratches noted

on the transfer charging roller?

Are the position and condition of

the transfer charging roller

pressure spring normal?

Try fresh copy. Is the problem

corrected?

Is the problem noted at the same

location on all copies?

Cause

Toner level

Photosensitive

drum

Primary

charging roller

Transfer

charging roller

Copy paper

Scanner rail,

scanner cable

Step

Results

YES

Action

The toner level may not

be adequate; advise the

user.

1. Clean the drum.

2. If scratches are found

on the drum, replace

the drum cartridge.

Check the primary

charging roller for

scratches and dirt.

End.

Check the transfer

charging roller for dirt

and scratches.

Replace the transfer

charging roller.

Correct or replace the

spring.

The paper may be moist;

advise the user on the

correct method of storing

paper.

1. Check the scanner

rail for foreign matter.

2. Adjust the tension of

the scanner cable.

13. The back of the copy is soiled.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-57

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Turn off the power switch while

paper is moving through the

feeding assembly. Is the back of

the copy soiled?

Execute ‘No. 403’ in service mode

(transfer roller cleaning). Is the

problem corrected?

Make several solid white copies. Is

the problem corrected?

Is the transfer charging roller

soiled excessively?

Is the problem noted norizontally

at intervals of about 4.2 cm?

Is the problem noted vertically at

intervals of about 1.6 cm?

Is the fixing pressure roller or the

fixing film soiled with toner?

Cause

Transfer

charging roller

Durm cartridge

Drum cleaning

assembly

(drum

cartridge)

Fixing

assembly

Step

Results

YES

Action

Go to step 7.

End.

Replace the transfer

charging roller.

1. Clean the registration

roller and transfer

guide.

2. Check the drum

cartridge for leakage

of toner.

1. Clean the manual

feed roller.

2. Check the drum

cartridge for leakage

of toner.

1. Clean the cleaning

assembly.

2. Check the drum

cartridge for leakage

of toner.

Clean the fixing pressure

roller and the fixing film.

Clean the delivery roller

and the fixing assembly

paper guide plate.

14. The copy has a fixing fault.

15, 16, 17 The leading edge of the copy is displaced.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-58

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Is the problem noted vertically?

Is the nip of the fixing assembly

within specification? (Use ‘No.

402’ of service mode.)

Cause

Fixing film

Lower fixing

roller pressure

Copy paper

Step

Results

YES

Action

Check the fixing film for

scratches.

Replace the lower fixing

roller pressure spring.

Try recommended

paper; if the results are

good, advise the user to

use recommended

paper.

Checks

Is the original placed correctly?

Is the copy paper of a type

recommended by Canon?

Has the pick-up roller or the

separation pad of the cassette

which caused the problem

reached its average life?

Does each registration roller rotate

normally?

Adjust the registration (leading

edge margin; ‘No. 305’ in service

mode). Is the problem corrected?

(See p. 10-5.)

Cause

Original

Copy paper

Pick-up roller,

separation pad

Cassette, paper

guide plate

Registration

Step

Results

YES

Action

Re-place the original.

Try recommended

paper; if the results are

good, advise the user to

use recommended

paper.

Check the rollers, and

replace those worn.

1. Check if paper is

correctly set in the

cassette.

2. Check the paper

guide for foreign

matter.

See “The registration

roller fails to rotate.”

End.

18. The copy has a blurred image.

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Does the cable overlap on the

cable pulley while the scanner is

moving? Is the cable too loose or

too tight?

Is the scanner rail soiled? Is

foreign matter found on the

scanner rail?

Is the gear of the scanner drive

assembly chipped?

Is the problem noted at intervals

of about 9.4 cm?

Is the problem noted at intervals

of about 4.2 cm?

Cause

Scanner drive

cable

Scanner rail

Scanner drive

system

Photosensitive

drum

Developing

gear

Drum drive

assembly

Step

Results

YES

Action

1. Re-route the cable.

2. If the cable is twisted

or frayed, replace it.

Clean the surface of the

scanner rail.

Replace the gear.

1. Check the drum drive

gear.

2. Check the drum end,

where it comes into

contact with the

developing spacer, for

scratches or

protrusions.

Check the developing

assembly.

Check the drum drive

assembly.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-59

19. The copy is foggy (horizontal).

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-60

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Is the problem noted at the same

position on all copies made in

Direct?

Does the scanning lamp flicker

when the scanner is moving

forward?

Check the developing assembly

spacer for toner adhesion or

deformation. Is toner noted on the

portion (photosensitive drum

surface) where the developing

assembly spacer comes into

contact?

Is the development bias applied

normally?

Make reduced copies, and check

them against copies made in

Direct. Is the problem noted at

different positions?

Cause

Scanning lamp

Developing

assembly spacer

Development

bias

Scanner

Feeding

assembly

Step

Results

YES

Action

Go to step 5.

Check the scanning

lamp.

Clean or, as necessary,

replace the developing

assembly.

Re-insert the developing

assembly; then, check

the wiring.

Check the scanner.

Check the feeding

assembly.

20. The copy has poor sharpness.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-61

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cause

Original

Copyboard

glass

Lens drive

assembly

Transfer

charging roller

Drum cartridge

Developing

assembly

Development

bias

Mirror

Scanner

Checks

Is the original off the glass

surface?

Is copyboard glass stained with

oil? Is the copyboard glass

attached correctly?

Turn off and on the power switch.

Does the lens move smoothly?

Execute ‘No. 403’ in service mode

(transfer roller cleaning). Is the

problem corrected?

Is the transfer charging roller

securely inserted?

Is dirt, cracks, or scratches noted

on the transfer charging roller?

Are the position and condition of

the transfer roller pressure spring

normal?

Is the drum cartridge securely

set? (Check if the spacer for the

developing assembly is in contact

with the photosensitive drum

under pressure.)

Is the development bias generated

normally?

Is the horizontal reproduction ratio

in Direct with on specification?

Step

Results

YES

Action

1. Check the copyboard

cover for warping.

2. Advise the user how

to place an original.

• Clean the copyboard

glass.

• Re-attach the

copyboard glass.

Check the lens drive

assembly.

End.

Re-insert the charging

roller.

Replace the transfer

charging roller.

Correct or replace the

spring.

Replace the drum

cartridge or the

developing assembly.

• Replace the composite

power supply PCB.

(Replace the DC con

troller PCB.)

Adjust the position

between No. 1 and No. 2

mirrors.

Clean the scanning

lamp, reflecting plate,

mirrors, lens, and dust-

proofing glass.

21. The copy is blank.

22. The copy is solid black.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-62

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Is the drum cartridge securely

inserted?

Is the drum cartridge rotating

during copying operation?

Is the transfer charging roller

securely inserted?

Is electrical leakage noted on

the transfer charging roller?

Is the reading in ‘No. 105’ of

service mode (primary charg-

ing current) 10 µA or less?

Cause

Drum cartridge

Drum drive

assembly

Transfer charg-

ing assembly

Composite

power supply

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

Insert the drum

cartridge.

1. Check if the

photosensitive drum

rotates smoothly.

2. Check the drum drive

assembly.

Re-insert the transfer

roller.

Check the transfer

charging roller.

Replace the composite

power supply PCB.

Checks

Does the scanning lamp remain

on during copying operation?

Does the pre-exposure lamp turn

on during copying operation?

Is the reading in ‘No. 105’ of

service mode (primary charging

current) 10 µA or less?

Cause

Composite

power supply

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

Make checks according

to the descriptions under

“The scanning lamp fails

to turn on.”

Make checks according

to the descriptions under

“The pre-exposure lamp

fails to turn on.”

Replace the composite

power supply PCB.

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS

A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions

1. E000

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-63

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Disconnect the connector (J4) of

the fixing heater, and press the

power switch while holding down

the service mode switch. (This

clears E000; about 2 sec later,

the power switch turns off

automatically. Is the connection of

J47 (4-pin connector near the rear

side plate fixing assembly)

connected properly?

Let the fixing assembly cool

sufficiently, and disconnect J47. Is

the resistance between J47-1 and

-2 on the thermistor side about

1.4 M and resistance between

J47-3 and -4 about 3.7 M ?

Is electrical continuity present

between J4-1 and -2?

Replace the upper fixing unit. Is

the problem corrected?

Replace the fixing heater driver

PCB. Is the problem corrected?

Cause

J47

(relay

connector to

thermistor)

Thermistor

Heater

Thermistor

Fixing heater

driver PCB

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

Re-connect it.

Replace the fixing upper

unit.

Replace the fixing upper

unit.

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

2. E001

3. E002, E003

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-64

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Disconnect the connector (J4) of

the fixing heater, and press the

power switch while holding down

the service mode switch. (This

clears E001; about 2 sec later,

the power switch turns off

automatically.) Let the fixing

assembly cool sufficiently; then,

disconnect J4. Is the resistance

between J47-1 and -2 about 0

and the resistance between J47-3

and-4 about 0 ?

Replace the fixing heater driver

PCB. Is the problem corrected?

Cause

Thermistor

Fixing heater

driver PCB

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

Replace the fixing upper

unit.

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

Checks

Disconnect the connector (J4) of

the fixing heater, and press the

power switch while pressing the

service mode switch. (This clears

the E code; about 2 sec later, the

power switch turns off

automatically.) Turn on the power

switch; is E000 indicated?

Is the wiring between J304 and

J47 on the DC controller PCB

proper?

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is

the problem corrected?

Cause

Wiring

DC controller

PCB

Fixing heater

driver PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

See the descriptions

under “E000.”

Correct the wiring.

End.

Replace the fixing heater

driver PCB.

4. E004

5. E007

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-65

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cause

Fixing film

tension roller

pressure

Fixing film

sensor

Fixing film

sensor (PS9)

Fixing film

motor (M4)

DC controller

PCB

Checks

Replace the fixing heater driver

PCB. Is the problem corrected?

Cause

Fixing heater

driver PCB

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

Checks

Is the fixing film cut or torn?

Does the problem occur when the

fixing film or the upper fixing unit

has been replaced?

Have as many as 200,000 copies

been made?

Is the tension spring of the fixing

film detecting lever normal?

Does it move smoothly?

Is the fixing film sensor (PS9)

normal?

Replace the fixing film motor

(M4).

Is the problem corrected?

Step

Results

YES

Action

Replace the fixing upper

unit

Adjust the fixing roller

pressure. (See p. 10-28.)

Replace the upper fixing

unit.

Correct the spring.

Check the wiring

between connectors

J304 and PS9 on the DC

controller PCB; if

normal, replace PS9.

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

6. E010

7. E030

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-66

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cause

Main motor unit

(M1; refers to

main motor and

main motor

driver PCB as

single entity)

DC controller

PCB

Drive belt

DC power

supply

Main motor unit

DC controller

PCB

Checks

Does the main motor rotate until

E010 is turned on?

Set the meter to the 12VDC

range. Does the voltage between

J303-3 (+; MMD) and J303-2 (-; 0

V) on the DC controller PCB

change from about 0 V to about

2.6 V or from about 5 V to about

2.6 V when the Copy Start key is

pressed or when WMUPR starts?

Is the drive belt routed properly?

Is the voltage between the

following connectors of the motor

driver PCB normal?

J501-1 (+; 34 V) and J501-2 (-; 0

Replace the main motor unit. Is

the problem corrected?

Step

Results

YES

Action

Go to step 3.

Replace the main motor

unit (M1).

Check the contact of the

connector (J502) on the

motor driver PCB and

the wiring from J502 to

the connector (J303) on

the DC controller PCB; if

normal, replace the main

motor unit or the DC

controller PCB.

Re-route the belt.

Check the wiring

between the connector

(J206) on the composite

power supply PCB and

the connector J501) on

the motor driver PCB; if

normal, see “DC power

supply is absent.”

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

Checks

Is the total copy counter operating

normally?

Cause

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

See “The copy counter

fails to operate.”

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

8. E064

9. E202 (keys on control panel invalidated)

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-67

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cause

Wire

Composite

power supply

PCB

Transfer charg-

ing assembly,

Transfer

charging roller

Primary

charging roller

High-voltage

cable

Checks

Turn off and on the power switch,

and set ‘1’ as the copy count. Is

E064 indicated after copying

operation?

Set ‘1’ as the copy count, and

press the Copy Start key once

again. Is E064 indicated after

copying operation?

Is a fault noted in the transfer

charging assembly/transfer roller

or contacts?

Detach the drum cartridge, and

check the primary charging roller.

Is a fault noted in the primary

charging roller or the contacts?

Detach the rear cover, and check

the high-voltage cable. Is a

scratch or crack found in the high-

voltage cable?

Step

Results

YES

Action

Check the harness

between the DC

controller PCB and the

composite power supply

PCB.

Go through steps 3

through 6; then, replace

the composite power

supply PCB.

Replace the transfer

corona assembly/transfer

roller.

Replace the drum

cartridge.

Replace the high-voltage

terminal.

Checks

Is the scanner at home position

when E202 is indicated?

Is the scanner home position

sensor (PS1) normal? (See

descriptions on how to check

photointerrupters.)

Cause

Scanner home

position sensor

(PS1)

DC controller

PCB check

Step

Results

YES

Action

See “The scanner fails to

move forward/

in reverse.”

Check the wiring

between the DC

controller PCB and PS1;

if normal, replace PS1.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

10. E210

11. E220

12. E240

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-68

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Turn on the power switch. Does

the lens move?

Is the lens home position sensor

(PS2) normal? (See the

instructions on how to check

photointerrupters.)

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is

the problem corrected?

Cause

Lens home

position sensor

(PS2)

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

See “The lens fails to

move.”

Check the wiring

between the connector

(J307) on the DC

controller PCB and the

lens home position

sensor (PS2); if normal,

replace PS2.

End.

Checks

Does the scanning lamp turn on?

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is

the problem corrected?

Cause

controller

Composite

power supply

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

See “The scanning lamp

fails to turn on.”

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

Check the wiring

between the DC

controller PCB and the

composite power supply

PCB; if normal, replace

the composite power

supply PCB.

Checks

Turn on and off the power switch.

Cause

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

13. E261

14. E710, E711, E712, E717

15. E803

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-69

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Turn off and on the power supply.

Is the problem corrected?

Replace the composite power

supply PCB. Is the problem

corrected?

Cause

Power supply

frequency

Composite

power supply

PCB

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

End.

• If the problem occurs

frequently, advise the

user to obtain a

frequency stabilizer.

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

Checks

Turn off and on the power switch.

Cause

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

Checks

Turn off and on the power switch.

Is the problem corrected?

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is

the problem corrected?

Cause

Malfunction

DC controller

PCB

Composite

power supply

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

End.

Replace the composite

power supply PCB.

16. AC power supply is absent.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-70

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Does an E code turn on when the

power switch is turned on, and the

power switch turn off within about

2 sec?

Is the power plug connected

securely?

Are the front door and the delivery

cover closed securely?

Is the specified voltage present at

the power outlet?

Is the specified voltage present

between J1-1 and J1-2? (J1 is the

2-pin connector on the power cord

mount.)

Is the circuit breaker on the

noise filter PCB off? (Use a

meter.)

Is the specified voltage present

between J13-1 and J13-2? (J13 is

the relay connector located

between the noise filter PCB and

the door switch assembly.)

Detach the door switch (DS1),

and connect the probes of the

meter to F1 and F3 or F2 and F5

of the door switch (fastons). Is the

resistance about 0 Ωwhen the

actuator is pressed and ∞ Ω when

released?

Is the wiring between the door

switch and the composite power

supply PCB normal?

Cause

E code (E000,

E001, E002,

E003 E004)

Power plug

Covers

Main power

supply

Noise filter PCB

(circuit breaker)

Noise filter PCB

Door switch

(DS1)

AC harness

Step

Results

YES

Action

Disconnect the

connector (J4) of the

fixing heater, and turn on

the power switch while

holing down the service

mode switch to clear the

E code; then, check the

error in ‘No. 108’ of

service mode for a

reference to the

appropriate description.

Re-connect the power

plug.

Close the door or the

cover.

Advise the user that the

problem is not of the

copier.

Go to step 7.

Remove the cause; turn

on the circuit breaker.

Replace the noise filter

PCB.

Replace the door switch

(DS1).

Correct the wiring.

17. DC power supply is absent.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-71

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Is electrical continuity present

between J211-1 on the composite

power supply PCB and J309-1 on

the DC controller PCB?

Replace the control panel.

Cause

Connector

(J211, J302,

J309)

Control panel

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

Check the connector

(J302) on the DC

controller PCB; if

normal, replace the DC

controller PCB.

End.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

Checks

Is AC power supply present

between the following terminals?

Composite Power Supply PCB

J2-1 (white) and J2-3 (black)

(J2 is the 3-pin connector on the

power supply cord mount.)

Turn off the power switch, and

disconnect all the following

connectors.

Composite Power Supply PCB

J206, J210

Set the meter to the 20V DC

range, and turn on the power

switch; is the voltage between the

following terminals normal?

Is the fuse of the composite

power supply PCB blown?

Cause

AC power

supply

Wiring, DC load

Fuse

Composite

power supply

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

See “AC power supply is

absent.”

Turn off the power

switch, and connect one

of the disconnected

connectors; then, turn on

the power switch.

Repeat the same on all

connectors to find out

the connector which

activates the protection

circuit; check the wiring

from that connector to

the DC loads.

Replace the fuse.

Replace the composite

power supply.

Connector

J206

J210

Pin No.

Output

34V

GND

24V

GND

34V

GND

Remarksr

to main

motor

driver PCB

DC con

troller PCB

18. The blank shutter fails to move.

19. The photosensitive drum fails to rotate.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-72

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Does the lens move?

Is the drive of the lens motor

transmitted to the gear of the

blank drive assembly?

Is the blank shutter cable routed

correctly?

Cause

Lens motor

Blank shutter

drive assembly

Blank shutter

cable

Step

Results

Action

See “The lens fails to

move.”

Make corrections so that

the drive is transmitted.

Re-route the cable.

Checks

Is E010 indicated?

Re-insert the drum cartridge. Is

the problem corrected?

Is the belt fro drive routed correctly?

Cause

Drum cartridge

Belt

Main drive

assembly

Step

Results

YES

Action

See “E010.”

End.

Re-route the belt.

Detach the main drive

assembly; correct or

replace pats as

necessary.

20. The pick-up operation fails (from cassette).

21. The pick-up operation from the multifeeder fails.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-73

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Is the paper inside the cassette

under the claws?

Slide out and then in the cassette.

Is the problem corrected?

Does the pick-up roller rotate after

the copy Start key is pressed?

Is the life of the pick-up roller or

the pick-up separation pad at its

limit?

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is

the problem corrected?

Cause

Paper (inside

cassette)

Cassette

Pick-up clutch

(CL2)

Pick-up roller,

pick-up

separation pad

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

Advise the user on the

correct method of setting

paper.

End.

• Advise the user on

the correct way to set

the cassette.

Check the wiring from

the connector (J303) on

the DC controller PCB

and the pick-up clutch; if

normal, replace the

clutch.

Replace the pick-up

roller or the pick-up

separation pad.

End.

Checks

Select the multifeeder, and press

the copy Start key. Does the

multifeeder pick-up roller rotate?

Does the paper guide plate spring

up when the Copy Start key is

pressed?

Connect the (+) probe of the

meter to J306-11 on the DC

controller PCB. Does the voltage

change from about 24 V to about

0 V when the Copy Start key is

pressed?

Cause

Multifeeder

pick-up clutch

(CL3)

Paper guide

plate cam

Multifeeder

pick-up

solenoid (SL2)

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

Check the wiring; if

normal, replace CL3.

Check the position of the

paper guide plate cam

and separation pad; as

necessary, adjust or

replace.

Check the wiring; if

normal, replace SL2.

Replace the DC

controller.

22. The scanner fails to move forward/in reverse.

23. The registration roller fails to rotate.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-74

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Is the cable for the scanner routed

correctly?

Is the scanner rail free of dirt, and

does the scanner move smoothly

when pushed by hand?

Set the meter to the 50V DC

range. Does the index of the

meter point to 34 V when the (+)

probe is connected to JJ210-5

and the (-) probe is connected to

J210-6 on the composite power

supply PCB?

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is

the problem corrected?

Replace the scanner motor. Is the

problem corrected?

Cause

Cable

Scanner path

Composite

power supply

PCB

DC controller

PCB

Scanner motor

Step

Results

YES

Action

Re-route the cable.

Check the scanner rail

for dirt and foreign

matter; in addition check

for objects that may

come into contact with

the scanner.

See “DC power supply is

absent.”

End.

Checks

Press the Copy Start key. Does

the registration roller rotate for

about 1 sec immediately after the

scanner starts to move forward?

Set the meter to the 30V DC

range. Is the voltage between

J303-5 (+) and J303-6 (-) on the

DC controller PCB change from

about 0 V to about 24 V when the

Copy Start key is pressed?

Cause

Registration

roller

DC controller

PCB

Registration

clutch (CL1)

Step

Results

YES

Action

Check the drive

assembly of the

registration roller.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

Check the wiring

between the DC con-

troller PCB and CL1; if

normal, replace the CL1.

24. The scanning lamp fails to turn on.

25. The lens fails to move.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-75

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Turn off the power switch, and

disconnect the power plug. Is the

lamp attached correctly?

Are the ends of the scanning lamp

black?

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is

the problem corrected?

Cause

Scanning lamp

DC controller

PCB

Composite

power supply

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

Re-attach the lamp.

Replace the scanning

lamp.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

Check the wiring

between the DC

controller PCB and the

composite power supply

PCB; if normal, replace

the composite power

supply PCB.

Checks

Turn off the power switch, and

detach the rear cover. Do the

change solenoid (SL1) turn on at

power-on? (Check with the naked

eye.)

Are the lens cable, pulley, and rail

normal?

Is 34 V being generated at the

J210-5 on the composite power

supply PCB?

Replace the lens motor. Is the

problem corrected?

Cause

Change

solenoid

(SL1)

Lens cable,

pulley, rail

DC power

supply

DC controller

PCB

Lens motor

(M3)

Step

Results

YES

Action

Check the wiring

between the DC

controller and SL1; if

normal, replace SL1.

Check the lens cable,

pulley, and rail; as

necessary, clean or re-

route the cable.

See “DC power supply is

absent.”

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

End.

26. The fixing heater fails to operate.

27. The pre-exposure lamp fails to turn on.

28. The add paper indicator fails to turn off.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-76

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Is E000 indicated?

Replace the DC control PCB. Is

the problem corrected?

Cause

DC controller

PCB

Fixing heater

driver

Step

Results

YES

Action

See the descriptions

under “E000.”

End.

Replace the fixing heater

drive PCB.

Checks

Detach the drum cartridge, and

execute ‘No. 407’ in service mode.

Does the pre-exposure lamp turn

on normally?

Replace the pre-exposure lamp.

Does it turn on normally?

Cause

DC controller

PCB

Pre-exposure

lamp

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

Replace the pre-

exposure lamp.

End.

Check the wiring

between the pre-

exposure lamp and the

DC controller PCB; if

normal, replace the DC

controller PCB.

Checks

Is the cassette set correctly?

Is the following sensor normal

(p. 10-39~10-41)?

PS4: cassette paper sensor

PS2cu: cassette 2 paper sensor

(accessory)

PS4cu: cassette 3 paper sensor

(accessory)

Cause

Cassette

Paper sensor

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

Set the cassette

correctly.

Check the lever and

wiring; if normal, replace

the sensor.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

29 The jam message fails to turn off.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-77

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Checks

Identify which sensor has

detected the jam in ‘No. 107’ of

service mode (jam history). Is

paper found near the sensor?

Is the sensor identified in step 1

normal? (See p. 10-36.)

Cause

Paper

Sensor

DC controller

PCB

Step

Results

YES

Action

Remove the paper.

Check the lever and the

wiring; if normal, replace

the sensor.

Replace the DC

controller PCB.

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS

A. Jams (copy paper)

Jams tend to occur in the following locations of the copier:

qpick-up assembly

wseparation/feeding assembly

efixing/delivery assembly

The descriptions that follow, therefore, are organized according to each of the above

locations.

When a jam occurs, try to find out the location and the type of the jam in service

mode ([1]; No. 101).

Figure 10-501

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-78

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Pick-Up Assembly

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-79

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cause

Cassette

Copy paper

DC controller

PCB, Pick-up

switch

Pick-up roller

Registration

roller drive

assembly

Registration

roller, vertical

path roller

Copy paper

Pick-up roller

Checks

Did the jam occur when the paper

was picked up from the cassette?

Is the cassette set in the copier

correctly?

Try a different cassette. Is the

problem corrected?

Is the copy paper curled or wavy?

Try Canon-recommended paper.

Is the problem corrected?

Does the pick-up roller of the

selected cassette holder rotate

during copying operation?

Is the pick-up roller deformed or

worn?

Try manual copying. Does the

main motor rotate?

Does the registration roller

operate normally?

Is the registration roller or the

vertical path roller deformed or

worn?

Try Canon-recommended paper.

Is the problem corrected?

Step

Results

YES

Action

Go to step 8.

Set the cassette

correctly.

Check the inside of the

cassette for foreign

matter.

Replace the copy paper;

advise the user for the

correct method of storing

paper.

Advise the user to use

recommended paper.

See “The pick-up

operation fails.”

Replace the pick-up

roller.

See “The pick-up

operation fails.”

See “The registration

roller fails to rotate.”

Replace the deformed or

worn roller.

Advise the user to use

recommended paper.

Check the pick-up roller

for wear or deformation.

2. Separation/Feeding Assembly

3. Fixing/Delivery Assembly

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-80

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cause

Transfer charg-

ing assembly

Copy paper

Feed belt

Checks

Is the transfer charging assembly

set correctly?

Are there burrs on the paper guide

of the transfer charging assembly?

Try Canon-recommended paper.

Is the problem corrected?

Are the two feeding belts rotating

properly?

Step

Results

YES

Action

Check the transfer

charging assembly.

Remove the burrs.

Advise the user to use

recommended paper.

Check the belt pulley.

Check the feed belt for

deformation or wear.

Cause

Delivery

assembly

separation claw

Lower fixing

roller, fixing

film

Paper guide

Nip

Delivery

lever

Delivery

sensor

(PS1)

Delivery

roller drive

assembly

Leading edge

margin

Checks

Is the separation claw worn or

deformed?

Is the lower fixing roller or the

fixing film deformed or worn?

Is the paper guide soiled with

toner?

Is the lower roller pressure (nip)

within specification?

Does the delivery detection lever

move smoothly?

Does the delivery sensor operate

normally? (See the descriptions

on how to check the

photointerrupters.)

Does the delivery roller move

smoothly?

Step

Results

YES

Action

1. Replace the

separation claw.

2. If dirt is found, clean

with solvent.

Replace the roller.

Clean with solvent.

Make adjustments.

Make adjustments so

that the lever moves

smoothly.

Replace the sensor.

Check the delivery roller

drive assembly.

Check if a margin exists

along the leading edge of

the copy.

Fixing assemblyDelivery assembly

B. Feeding Faults

1. Double feeding

2. Wrinkling

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-81

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cause

Separation pad

Spring

Checks

Is the separation pad deformed or

worn?

Step

Results

YES

Action

Replace the separation

pad.

Push up the separation

pad, and try replacing

the spring.

Cause

Pick-up

assembly

Copy paper

Paper guide

Lower roller

pressure

Top unit,

lower roller

Checks

Turn off the power while copy

paper is moving through the

feeding assembly. At the time, is

wrinkling noted? Or, is the paper

moving askew?

Try fresh paper. Is the problem

corrected?

Is Canon-recommended paper

used?

Is the paper guide soiled with

toner or the like?

Is the lower roller pressure (nip)

within specification?

Step

Results

YES

Action

Check the pick-up

assembly; check the

registration roller.

The paper may be moist;

advise the user on the

correct method of storing

paper.

Advise the user to use

recommended paper.

Clean with solvent.

Make adjustments.

Try replacing the top unit

or the lower roller.

Fixing assembly

10-82

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

VI ARRANGEMENT/FUNCTIONS OF THE

ELECTRICAL PARTS

A. Sensors

Figure 10-601

10-83

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Symbol Name

Photointerrupter

Toner sensor

Thermistor

Volume

Thermal fuse

Ref.

PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

PS5

PS6

PS7

PS8

PS9

PS10

Q561

Q562

Q563

Q564

ATS

TH1

TH2

TH3

TH4

VR1

FU1

Description

detects scanner home position

detects lens home position

detects blank shutter home position

detects presence/absence of paper in cassette

detects presence/absence of paper in multifeeder

detects paper in front of registration roller

detects paper in separation assembly

detects paper in delivery assembly

detects belt

detects right door (open/closed)

cassette size detection 1

cassette size detection 2

cassette size detection 3

cassette size detection 4

detects toner inside developing assembly

fixing heater temperature detection 1

fixing heater temperature detection 2

fluorescent lamp temperature detection

ambient temperature detection

multifeeder paper width detection

fixing heater overheating detection

Table 10-601

B. Clutches, Solenoids, and Switches

Figure 10-602

10-84

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-85

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 10-602

Symbol Name

Clutch

Solenoid

Push switch

Switch

Varistor

Counter

Ref.

CL1

CL2

CL3

SL1

SL2

SL3

SL4

SL5

DS1

SW1

SW2

ZD1

ZD2

CNT1

CNT2

Description

registration clutch

pick-up clutch

multifeeder pick-up clutch

change solenoid

multifeeder holding plate solenoid

blank shutter

primary charging roller cleaning solenoid

transfer changing roller releasing solenoid

door switch

anti-condensation switch

fluorescent lamp heater switch

transfer guide varistor

attraction plate varistor

total copy counter

option counter

CNT

10-86

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Motors, Heaters, and Lamps

Figure 10-603

10-87

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 10-603

Symbol Name

Motor

Fan motor

Heater

Fluorescent

lamp

Lamp

Ref.

FM1

FL1

LA1

Description

main motor

scanning motor

lens motor

fixing belt motor

heat exhaust fan

fixing heater

fluorescent lamp heater

lens heater

scanning lamp

pre-exposure lamp

10-88

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

D. PCBs

Figure 10-604

Table 10-604

10-89

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Ref.

Name

Noise filter

Composite power supply

DC controller

AE sensor

Intensity sensor

Control panel

High-voltage connector

Development bias connector

Heater driver

Heater on detection

Function

noise prevention

DC power supply, high-voltage generation

sequence control

original density detection

fluorescent lamp intensity detection

control panel keys, LEDs

charging, transfer, static eliminating power relay

development power relay

fixing heater drive

fixing heater drive detection

10-90

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

E. Cassette Feeding Module – A2

Figure 10-605

PS1cu

PS3cu PS2cu

M1cu

CL2cu

CL1cu

PS4cu

Q564-2

Q563-2

Q562-2

Q561-2

PS5cu

Q564-3

Q563-3

Q562-3

Q561-3

Hcu

10-91

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 10-605

Symbol Name

Photointerrupter

Motor

Clutch

Heater

Cassette driver

Ref.

PS1cu

PS2cu

PS3cu

PS4cu

PS5cu

Q561-2

Q562-2

Q563-2

Q564-2

Q561-3

Q562-3

Q563-3

Q564-3

M1cu

CL1cu

CL2cu

Hcu

Description

mcassette 2 vertical path detection

cassette 2 paper detection

cassette 3 vertical path detection

cassette 3 paper detection

cassette right door open/closed detection

cassette 2 paper size detection 1

cassette 2 paper size detection 2

cassette 2 paper size detection 3

cassette 2 paper size detection 4

cassette 3 paper size detection 1

cassette 3 paper size detection 2

cassette 3 paper size detection 3

cassette 3 paper size detection 4

cassette unit motor

cassette 2 pick-up clutch

cassette 3 pick-up clutch

cassette heater (accessory)

relay PCB

F. Variable Resistors (VR) and Check Pins by PCB

Of all the VRs and check pins found in the copier, those that are needed in the field

are discussed.

Caution:

Do not touch the VRs and check pins that are not discussed herein; they are for

factory adjustment only and require special tools and instruments and must be

adjusted with high precision.

1. DC controller PCB

Figure 10-606

10-92

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

3 J311 1 2 J309 20 1 J310 15

11 J303 1

15 J306 6

7 J307 6 10 J308 1 12 J304 1 1 J305 6

1 J314 121 J315 7J316

J317 1

J322

J312

15 J302 1

5 J318 1

J356

J324

B10 J319 B1

A1 A10

1J301 6

11 J313 1

J320

SW303 5

J351

J353

SW302

J321

VR302 VR301

VR391

2. Composite power supply PCB

Figure 10-607

10-93

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

J212

J209

J211

J908

J202

J204

J906

LED501

J213

J210

J206

J205

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-94

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Item

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

Description

control display mode

I/O display mode

adjustment mode

operation/inspection mode

specification mode

counter mode

VII. SERVICE MODE

A. Outline

The copier’s service mode may be classified into the following six:

Table 10-701

B. Using Service Mode

1. Activating Service Mode

1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator.

• If you want to make checks for I/O display mode or the like while making copies,

set the copy mode.

2) Press the service mode switch (SW302) on the DC controller with hex key.

• The copy count indicator indicates [1].

• While service mode is activated, the copy density indicator LED indicates the

position of the fixing belt.

• A press on the reset key de-activates service mode.

Figure 10-701

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-95

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2. Selecting a Service Mode

1) While the copy count indicator is indicating [1], press a key from [1] through [6] to

select the appropriate mode.

2) Press the AE key.

• The copier activates the selected mode, and the copy count indicator indicates

‘301’ or the like; ‘301’ represents the first mode of those represented by [3].

3. Selecting Items

1) While the 100th digit on the copy count indicator is flashing (‘301’ or the like), press

the keypad to select the mode to execute.

• The copy count indicator indicates the selected number; only the 100th digit is

flashing.

• A press on the Clear key returns to selecting a mode ([3] or the like).

2) Press the Start key.

• The copier activates the specified mode.

4. Using Adjustment Mode [3] and Specification Mode [5]

1) Press the keypad, and change the setting.

• The value is flashed.

• If the value is a negative value, ‘%’ turns on. To enter a negative value, press the

% key, and then enter the number using the keypad.

2) Press the AE key.

• The copier stores the value, and flashes it.

• A press on the Start key starts copying operation.

3) To change the settings continuously, repeat steps 1) and 2).

4) A press on the Clear key returns to selecting items.

5. Using Operation/Inspection Mode [4]

1) A press on the Start key executes the selected service mode.

2) A press on the Stop key stops the operation and then returns to selecting items.

• If the mode is of a type that stops automatically, the operation stops and returns

to selecting items automatically.

6. Clearing Stored Error Code

If E000, E001, E002, E003, E004, or E007 is indicated, remove the cause of the

error, and clear the back-up information.

1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator.

2) While holding down the service mode switch (SW302) on the DC controller with a hex

key, press the power switch.

3) In about 2 sec, the power goes off; press the power switch once again.

Note:

The copier turns itself off automatically if it detects E000, E001, E002, E003, or

E004, not responding to a press on the power switch. To check the error in service

mode, perform the above after disconnecting the connector of the heater.

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-96

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

No.

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

310

311

312

313

314

315

316

317

318

319

320

321

322

323

324

325

326

AE_LIGHT

AE_SHIFT

AE_SLOPE

HEATER

REGIST

LE_BLANK

REGIST_R

LE_BLANK_R

TE_BLANK

TE_BLANK_MF

B_HOME

B_HOME_RE

PRIMARY

IP_OFST

PW_OFST

IP_ADJ

PH_ADJ

ATVC_STD

MF_LOOP

C1_LOOP

C2_LOOP

C3_LOOP

C1_CL_OFF

C2_CL_OFF

C3_CL_OFF

LIGHT

TYP

7. Recording on the Service Mode Label

Figure 10-702 shows the label attached behind the front door. At the factory, each

machine is adjusted, and the settings used at the time are recorded on the label.

You must record new settings if you changed them in the field. If you replaced the DC

controller, be sure to store the settings recorded on the label in service mode.

In addition, if you have replaced drun unit or the composite power supply, enter the

settings recorded on the service label attached to the new drum unit or composite

power supply and, at the same time, copy the setting on the service label (Figure 10-

702)

Figure 10-702

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Control Display Mode [1]

• To select an item, press the appropriate key on the keypad and then the Start key.

• To clear an item, press the Clear key.

• A press on the Start key while a service mode is indicated executes the respective

operation.

Table 10-702

10-97

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

No.

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

116

137

138

139

155

Description

Jam location

Fixing belt sensor ON time

Power supply voltage

Primary charging voltage

Primary charging current

Intensity

Jam history

Error history (E code)

Temperature detected by fixing main

thermistor (TH1)

Temperature detected by fixing sub

thermistor (TH2)

Temperature detected by ambient

thermistor (TH301; DC controller)

AE sensor output

ROM version number

ROM release number

Intensity at time of scanning

Factory mode

Remarks

The display indicates the location of the jam

on the copy count indicator; see below.

unit: ms

The actual ON time is the value that is

obtained by multiplying the indicated value

by 2.56; the copy density indicator indicates

the position of the belt.

unit: V

The actual primary charging voltage is the

value obtained by turning the displayed value

into negative and subtracting 1000 from it.

unit: µA

unit: lux

The actual intensity (lux) is the value obtained

by dividing the displayed value by 100.

See below.

The display indicates a history of the most

recent three errors; a press on [1], [2], or [3] on

the keypad indicates the most recent, second

recent, and third recent errors respectively.

unit: °C

Normal if the value changes for each

original in AE mode.

Indicates the parts number of the ROM.

Indicates the version of the program.

Normal: between 68 and 72

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-98

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

LED (ON)

1-a

1-b

1-c

1-d

1-e

1-f

1-g

2-a

2-b

2-c

2-d

2-e

Jam

pre-registration delay jam

pre-registration stationary jam

separation delay jam

separation stationary jam

delivery delay jam

delivery stationary jam

sorter jam

door open

cassette 2 pick-up delay jam

cassette 2 pick-up stationary jam

cassette 3 pick-up delay jam

cassette 3 pick-up stationary jam

2-a 1-a

2-f 2-b

2-g

2-e 2-c

2-d

1-f

1-g

1-b

1-e

1-d

1-c

No. 101 Jam Location Indicator

In this mode, the copy count indicator turn on to indicate the type of jam. If both delay

and stationary are indicated for the same sensor, i.e., at time of power-on or standby, the

copier has detected copy paper when it was not making copies.

No. 104 Jam History

The 100th digit of the copy count indicator indicates how recent the jam is; to indicate

the jam that occurred second most recently, press [2] on the keypad. As in ‘No. 101’ (jam

location), the 10th digit indicates the type of jam.

Example: The most recent jam is a pre- The second most recent jam is a door

registration delay jam. open jam.

Table 10-703

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

D. I/O Mode [2]

• Press [2] on the keypad and the AE key to activate I/O display mode.

• To clear an item, press the Clear key.

• A press on the Start key while a service mode is indicated executes the respective

operation.

Table 10-12

10-99

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

No.

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

Description

Port C digit 4

Port C digit 5

Port C digit 6

Port C digit 7

Port H

Fixing main thermistor (TH1) voltage

Fixing sub thermistor (TH2) voltage

AE sensor voltage

Ambient temperature thermistor

(TH301) voltage

Multifeeder paper width sensor

voltage

Intensity sensor voltage

Copy density correction knob/switch

voltage

Toner level sensor

Remarks

When the mode is activated, the copy count

indicator turns on to indicate the I/O of the

input port; see below.

When the mode is activated, the copy count

indicator turns on to indicate the I/O of the

input port; see below.

When this mode is activated, the copy

count indicator turns on to indicate the I/O

of the input port; see below.

When this mode is activated, the copy

count indicator turns on to indicate the I/O

of the input port; see below.

When this mode is activated, the copy

count indicator turns on to indicate the I/O

of the input port; see below.

Indicates the measurement of voltage using

0 through 255.

Indicates the measurement of voltage using

0 through 255.

Indicates the measurement of voltage using

0 through 255.

Indicates the measurement of voltage using

0 through 255.

Indicates the measurement of voltage using

0 through 255.

Indicates the measurement of voltage using

0 through 255.

Indicates the measurement of voltage using

0 through 255.

Indicates the measurement of voltage using

0 through 255.

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

LED (copy count indicator; from 201 to 205)

No. 201/202/203/204 Port C Digital Display

10-100

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-a 1-a

2-f 2-b

2-g

2-e 2-c

2-d

1-f

1-g

1-b

1-e

1-d

1-c

No.

201

202

203

Description

Cassette 2 connect

Options counter open circuit

Jumper connector 3

Cassette size 1 (cassette 2)

Cassette size 2 (cassette 2)

Cassette size 3 (cassette 2)

Cassette size 4 (cassette 2)

Not used

Main motor lock

Control Card IV connect

Total counter connect

Option counter connect

Cassette size 1 (cassette 3)

Cassette size 2 (cassette 3)

Cassette size 3 (cassette 3)

Cassette size 4 (cassette 3)

Not used

Service mode switch

Jumper connector 1

Jumper connector 2

Total counter open circuit

Cassette size 1 (cassette 1)

Cassette size 2 (cassette 1)

Cassette size 3 (cassette 1)

Cassette size 4 (cassette 1)

Cassette 3 vertical path

sensor (PS3cu)

Remarks

ON: connected

ON: open

ON: connected

ON: light-blocking plate present

ON: locked

ON: connected

ON: light-blocking plate present

ON: pushed

ON: connected

ON: open

ON: light-blocking plate present

LED

1-a

1-b

1-c

1-d

1-e

1-f

1-g

2-a

2-b

1-a

1-b

1-c

1-d

1-e

1-f

1-g

2-a

2-b

1-a

1-b

1-c

1-d

1-e

1-f

1-g

2-a

2-b

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 10-13

No. 205 Port H Display

Table 10-14

10-101

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

No.

204

Description

Right door open/closed

sensor (PS10)

Separation sensor (PS7)

Cassette paper sensor

(PS4)

Multifeeder paper sensor

(PS5)

Cassette 2 paper sensor

(PS2cu)

Cassette 3 paper sensor

(PS4cu)

Delivery sensor (PS8)

Cassette right door

open/closed sensor (PS5cu)

Cassette 2 vertical path

sensor (PS1cu)

Remarks

ON: light-blocking plate present (paper

present)

ON: light-blocking plate present (right door

closed)

ON: light-blocking plate present (paper

absent)

ON: light-blocking plate present (paper

absent)

ON: light-blocking plate present (paper

absent)

ON: light-blocking plate present (paper

absent)

ON: light-blocking plate present (paper

present)

ON: light-blocking plate present (right door

closed)

ON: light-blocking plate present (paper

present)

LED

1-a

1-b

1-c

1-d

1-e

1-f

1-g

2-a

2-b

Connector

J314-2

J353-6

J307-2

J315-2

J304-12

J324-2

J302-12

J302-14

Description

Registration sensor

PCB check

Lens home position sensor

(PS2)

Blank shutter home position

sensor (PS3)

Fixing film sensor (PS9)

Heater on detection

(triac short circuit)

Composite power supply ACK

AC pulse

Remarks

ON: paper present

For factory only

ON: at HP

ON film detected

ON: heater ON detected

ON: acknowledged

ON: H, OFF: L

LED

1-a

1-b

1-c

1-d

1-e

1-f

1-g

2-a

2-b

Signal

RPD

PCBCH*

LHP

BSHP

FFD

HTON*

CP-ACK

AC-MNTR

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

E. Adjustment Mode [3]

• To activate adjustment mode, press [3] on the keypad and then the AE key.

• To select an item, press the appropriate key on the keypad and then the Start key.

• To change the setting, press the appropriate keys on the keypad and then the AE key.

• To cancel an item, press the Clear key.

• A press on the Start key executes the respective operation.

• If the value is a negative value, ‘%’ is turned on; to enter a negative value, press

the % key and the value on the keypad.

Table 10-15-1

Note: A press on the Start key when in No. 305, 306, 307, or 308 makes copies in

the mode that has been effective before the activation of the mode; when

executing No. 307 or 308, it is recommended that page separation mode be

selected before activating service mode.

10-102

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

No.

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

310

Description

Automatic lamp intensity

adjustment for AE scans

Copy density (development bias)

reference point adjustment for

AE mode

Copy density (development bias)

slope adjustment for AE mode

Fixing heater resistance storage

Leading edge margin adjustment

(registration roller ON timing)

Leading edge non-image width

adjustment (timing at which

blank open/close shutter for

blank exposure is closed)

Leading edge registration adjust-

ment for right face in page separa-

tion (registration roller ON timing)

Leading edge margin adjustment for

right face in page separation (timing

at which blank shutter is closed)

Trailing edge non-image width

adjustment (timing at which

open/close shutter for blank

exposure is opened)

Leading edge non-image width

for multifeeder (timing at which

the open/close shutter for blank

exposure is opened)

Remarks

See p. 10-11.

See p. 10-13.

default: 0

See p. 10-13.

default: 0

See p. 10-31.

A higher value delays the copy

paper in relation to the image,

reducing the margin.

default: 32 unit: 0.27 mm

A higher setting increases the

leading edge non-image width.

default: 32 unit: 0.27 mm

A higher setting delays the copy

paper in relation to the image.

default: 32 unit: 0.27 mm

A higher setting increases the

leading edge margin.

default: 32 unit: 0.27 mm

A higher setting reduces the trailing

edge margin.

default: 32 unit: 0.27 mm

A higher setting reduces the trailing

edge margin.

default: 32

unit: 0.27 mm

Settings

-26 ~ +26

0 ~ 63

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-103

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

No.

311

312

313

314

315

316

317

318

319

Description

Left/right margin adjustment

(Direct; home position for slide

shutter for blank exposure)

Left/right margin adjustment

(Reduce; travel distance of slide

shutter for blank exposure)

Primary output voltage correction

(corrects output voltage

determined by APVC)

APVC measured current shift

(corrects the results of APVC)

Voltage correction for

measurement in APVC (corrects

voltage for measurement applied

at time of APVC)

Measurement current correction

for APVC (corrects current

measured at time of APVC)

Fluorescent lamp pre-heating

current adjustment

Transfer output voltage

adjustment (corrects transfer

voltage determined by ATVC)

Arch adjustment when

multifeeder is used (pick-up roller

OFF timing)

Remarks

A higher setting increases the

margin on both left and right.

default: 8

unit: 0.27 mm

A higher setting increases the

margin on both left and right.

default: 0

unit: 0.27 mm

Enter the setting recorded on the label

after replacing the drum cartridge.

Enter the setting recorded on the label

after replacing the drum cartridge.

default: 0

unit: 16 V

Enter the value recorded on the label

on the composite power supply when

replacing the composite power supply.

default: 0

Enter the value recorded on the

label on the composite power

supply when replacing the

composite power supply.

default: 0

Enter the value recorded on the

label on the composite power

supply when replacing the

composite power supply.

Convert the value recorded on the

label on the composite power

supply as follows and change the

value recorded on the service label;

then, enter the value when replacing

the composite power supply.

Label Input Label Input

→06→+1

2→-1 7 →+2

3→-2 8 →+3

4→-3 9 →+4

5→-4

A higher setting increases the arch.

default: 25

unit: 0.27 mm

Settings

0 ~ 15

-10 ~ +10

-16 ~ +16

-40 ~ +40

-16 ~ +16

-10 ~ +10

-9 ~ +9

-4 ~ +4

0 ~ 63

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 10-15-2

10-104

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

No.

320

321

322

323

324

325

326

Description

Arch adjustment when cassette

2 is used (pick-up roller OFF

timing)

Arch adjustment when cassette

2 is used (pick-up roller OFF

timing)

Arch adjustment when cassette

2 is used (pick-up roller OFF

timing)

Pick-up clutch (CL2) off timing

adjustment

Cassette 2 pick-up clutch

(CL1cu) off timing adjustment

Cassette 3 pick-up clutch

(CL2cu) off timing adjustment

Scanning lamp intensity

adjustment

Remarks

A higher setting increases the arch.

default: 25

unit: 0.27 mm

A higher setting increases the arch.

default: 25

unit: 0.27 mm

A higher setting increases the arch.

default: 25

unit: 0.27 mm

For factory only

default: 32

For factory only

default: 20

For factory only

default: 20

For factory only

default: 75

Settings

0 ~ 63

0 ~ 76

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

F. Operation/Inspection Mode [4]

• To activate operation/inspection mode, press [4] on the keypad and then the AE key.

• To select an item, press the appropriate key on the keypad and then the Start key.

• To execute the mode, press the Start key.

• To stop the operation, press the Stop key; the copier returns to selecting an item.

• If the mode is of a type that stops automatically, the copier automatically returns

to selecting an item.

10-105

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

No.

401

402

403

404

405

406

407

408

409

Description

Developing assembly idle rotation

Primary roller cleaning

Transfer roller cleaning

Fixing tension roller

Fixing film initial rotation mode

Nip check

Fixing film displacement correction

Scanning lamp ON check

Control panel indicators ON

Remarks

Use it after supplying toner at time of installation.

Use it to adjust the fixing film drive roller

pressure for the upper fixing unit. (See p. 10-

28.) Fix the fixing tension roller and cause the

fixing film to rotate idly. The ON period of the

fixing film sensor is indicated by the copy

count indicator, and the film position is

indicated by the copy density indicator.

Another press on the Start key checks the

position of the fixing film automatically.

Execute the mode when you have replaced

the fixing film or the upper fixing unit to return

the fixing film to its appropriate position. (See

p. 10-28.) The film stops as soon as it

reaches the appropriate position automatically.

The position of the film in travel is indicated by

the copy density indicator.

Use tit to check the nip or when adjusting the

lower fixing roller. (See p. 10-30.)

The fixing film stops when it reaches the

appropriate position or when 30 sec has

passed. The position of the film in travel is

indicated by the copy density indicator, and

the fixing film ON period is indicated by the

copy count indicator. The position is normal if

the copy density indicator indicates ‘5’ when

the film stops; otherwise, check the fixing film

and the tension roller. If the fixing film

becomes displaced and E007 is indicated, try

this mode. (This will prove to be highly useful

if displacement occurs because of a minor

accident.)

A press on the Start key keeps the lamp on

after about 1.5 sec.

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 10-16

10-106

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

No.

410

411

412

450

Description

Scanner forward stop

Pre-exposure lamp on

Drum unit installation mode

Back-up RAM clear

Remarks

Execute it when installing or replacing the

drum unit; a press on the Start key will

automatically activate APVC measurement

mode; the mode ends in about 23 sec.

See p. 10-35

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-107

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

G. Specification Settings Mode [5]

• To activate specification settings mode, press [5] on the keypad and then the AE key.

• To select an item, press the appropriate key on the keypad and then the Start key.

• To change the setting, press the appropriate keys on the keypad and then the AE key.

• To clear an item, press the Clear key.

• A press on the Start key executes the respective operation.

Table 10-17

No.

501

502

503

504

505

506

507

508

Description

Characteristics storage for

multifeeder paper width sensor

Copy density notation switching

(9/17 steps)

Auto power-off cancel

Copy count upper limit

Universal cassette paper size

Separation static eliminator output

voltage switching

Fixing forced wait

Fixing control temperature

switching

Remarks

See p. 10-43.

9 steps: 0

17 steps: 1

default: 0 (9 steps)

• When ‘1’ is entered on the keypad, the

notation will be ‘ON’, activating the auto

power-off function.

• When ‘0’ is entered on the keypad, the

notation will be ‘OFF’, de-activating the auto

power-off function.

default: on.

The auto power-off period is set in user mode;

since the copier’s WAIT time is 0, it is best to

keep the auto power-off mechanism to be

enabled.

settings:0 to 99

default: 0

When set to ‘0’, the upper limit will be 100

copies.

See p. 10-44.

settings:0 to 14

default: 0

002: 2.5 kV

004: 4 kV

default: 0

When activated, the period of initial rotation is

increased; activate it if the fixing on the first copy

is poor because of low temperature conditions.

0: disabled

1: enabled

default: 0

001: 225°C See p. 10-32.

002: 215°C

003: 200°C

default: 002

H. Counter Mode [6]

• To activate the mode, press [6] on the keypad and then the AE key.

• To select an item, press the appropriate key on the keypad and then the Start key.

• To cancel an item, press the Clear key.

• A press on the Start key executes the respective service operation.

• To obtain the actual count, multiply the indication by 100.

Table 10-18

10-108

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

No.

601

602

603

Description

Large copy counter

Small copy counter

Total copy counter/drum counter

Remarks

For North America only; indicates the use of

the drum unit in terms of copies made, and

cleared when the drum unit is replaced.

VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS

A. Copier

The microprocessor on the copier’s DC controller is provided with a self diagnosis

mechanism that checks the condition of the machine (sensors, in particular). The copier

runs self diagnosis and, when it identifies an error, indicates a code that represents each

specific error. If the copier finds an error associated with E000, E001, E002, E003, and

E004, it automatically shuts itself off (error auto power-off).

Table 10-19-1

10-109

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Cause

• Thermistor (TH1, TH2;

displacement, poor

contact, open circuit)

• Fixing heater (H1; open

circuit, crack)

• Thermal fuse (FU1;

malfunction)

• Triac (faulty)

• DC controller (faulty)

• Thermistor (TH1, TH2;

short circuit)

• Triac (faulty)

• DC controller (faulty)

• Thermistor (TH1, TH2;

displacement, poor

contact, open circuit)

• Fixing heater (H1; open

circuit, crack)

• Thermal fuse (FU1;

malfunction)

• Triac (faulty)

• DC controller (faulty)

Description

• Beginning 1 second after the copy START key

is pressed, the main thermister (TH1) does

not reach 50°C for 200 ms.

• Beginning 2 second after the copy START key

is pressed, the main thermister (TH1) does

not reach 60°C for 200 ms.

• Beginning 4 second after the copy START key

is pressed, the main thermister (TH1) does

not reach 70°C for 200 ms.

• The detection temperature of the thermistor

(TH1) exceeds 250°C during copying operation.

• The detection temperature of the sub

thermistor (TH2) exceeds 260°C during

copying operation.

• The detection temperature of the thermistor

(TH1, TH2) rises 30°C over the specified

temperature during copying operation.

• The detection temperature of the thermistor

(TH1, TH2) rises 30°C over the specified

temperature during copying operation.

• The thermistor detects a rise in temperature of

40°C or more during standby.

• The temperature has increased over 100°C or

more within 1 sec after the thermistor (TH1,

TH2) has detected 100°C.

• Beginning 1 second after the main thermister

(TH1) detection temperature reaches 60°C, the

first thermister does not reach 70°C for 200 ms.

• Beginning 1 second after the main thermister

(TH1) detection temperature reaches 70°C, the

first thermister does not reach 80°C for 200 ms.

• Beginning 1 second after the main thermister

(TH1) detection temperature reaches 80°C, the

first thermister does not reach 90°C for 200 ms.

• Beginning 1 second after the main thermister

(TH1) detection temperature reaches 90°C, the

first thermister does not reach 95°C for 200 ms.

E000

E001

E002

Table 10-19-2

10-110

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Cause

• Thermistor (TH1, TH2;

displacement, poor contact,

open circuit)

• Fixing heater (H1; open circuit,

crack)

• Thermal fuse (FU1;

malfunction)

• Triac (faulty)

• DC controller (faulty)

• Triac (faulty)

• Heater ON detection PCB

(faulty)

• Fixing film (displacement, tear)

• Tension roller (displacement,

malfunction)

• Fixing film motor (M4; faulty)

• Fixing film sensor (PS9; faulty)

• Main motor (M1; faulty)

• DC controller (faulty)

• Counter (open circuit)

• DC controller (faulty)

• Composite power supply

(faulty)

• DC controller (faulty)

• Scanner cable (displacement, tear)

• Scanner home position sensor

(PS1; faulty)

• Scanner motor (M2; faulty)

• DC controller (faulty)

Description

• After the main thermistor (TH1) detection

temperature reaches 95°C, the main ther-

mister detects lower than 95°C for 200 ms.

• After the sub thermistor (TH2) detection

temperature reaches 70°C, the sub ther-

mister detects less than 70°C for 200 ms.

The fixing heater is identified as being on

when the fixing heater drive signal is off

(HTRD=0).

The fixing film sensor output remains ‘1’ or

‘0’ for 1.35 sec or more.

Reference:

The fixing film takes about 1.3 sec to make

a full rotation.

The main motor revolution is not as speci-

fied (MLOCK=0) for 1 sec or more while the

main motor drive signal is on (MMD=1).

Checks are made immediately before the

counter turns on or off and when copying

operation is started.

Normal if drive signal = 0 at time the

counter turns on; Normal if drive signal = 1

at time the counter turns off.

Note: Checks are made only when the

counter is installed.

The high voltage of the composite power

supply is different from the setting.

The scanner does not return to the home

position within 5 sec when it is started.

E002 may be checked in ‘No. 108’ of

service mode.

E003

E004

E030

E007

E010

E064

E202

(keys on

control panel

disabled)

Table 10-19-3

10-111

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Cause

• Lens cable (displacement, tear)

• Lens home position sensor

(PS2; faulty)

• Slide shutter (operation)

• Blank shutter home position

sensor (PS3; faulty)

• Change solenoid (SL1; faulty)

• Lens motor (M3; faulty)

• DC controller (faulty)

• Scanning lamp (faulty)

• Composite power supply

(faulty)

• DC controller (faulty)

• Composite power supply

(faulty)

• Power supply frequency

(fluctuation)

• Composite power supply

(faulty)

• DC controller (faulty)

• DF controller (faulty)

• Connector (poor contact)

• DC controller (faulty)

• The Remote Diagnostic

Device II controller (faulty)

• Communication (with the

Remote Diagnostic Device II)

Description

• The lens home position sensor signal

(LHP) is not generated within a specific

period of time after the power switch has

been turned on.

• The lens home position signal (LHP) is

generated longer than a specific period of

time.

• The blank shutter home position signal

(BSHP) is not generated when the slide

shutter is moving.

• The lamp is identified as being on during

standby.

• The lamp is identified as being off during

copying operation.

A communication error is detected between

the CPU (Q301) on the DC controller and the

CPU (Q512) on the composite power supply.

The intervals of the zero cross signal is

outside the tolerance.

The IPC (Q104) cannot be initialized at

power-on.

An IPC communication error has been

detected twice within 1 sec.

An error in communication with the DF

cannot be cleared.

• A communication with the Remote

Diagnostic Device II has been

successfully but failed in the middle.

• An open circuit is detected on the line with

the Remote Diagnostic Device II.

E210

E220

E717

E240

E261

E711

E712

E710

Clearing an Error Code (back-up data)

When the self diagnosis mechanism has been activated, the copier may be reset by

turning its power off and on. However, this does not work for E000, E001, E002, E003,

or E004; this arrangement is to prevent the user from causally resetting any of the errors,

which could damage the film or the heater in side the fixing assembly.

If E000, E001, E002, E003, or E004 is indicated, remove the cause and clear the

back-up data as follows:

1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator.

2) Press the power switch while holding down the service mode switch (SW302) on the

DC controller with a hex key.

3) The power should go off in about 2 sec; turn on the power.

Caution:

Detection of E000, E001, E002, E003, or E004 automatically turns off the copier. To

check the type of error in service mode, go through the above steps after

disconnecting the fixing heater.

10-112

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Self Diagnosis (ADF)

Table 10-20

Note:

To reset the copier after activation of the self diagnosis mechanism, switch the

copier off and then on.

You can still continue to make copies even when the ADF is out of order; simply

open the ADF, and set the documents on the copyboard glass.

10-113

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Cause

• data communication with

copier (error)

• belt motor (fails to rotate)

• belt motor clock sensor (faulty)

• delivery motor (fails to rotate)

• delivery motor clock sensor

(faulty)

• document detection (faulty)

• registration sensor (faulty)

• document edge sensor (faulty)

Description

The data communication is monitored at all

times; the error is identified if the

communication with the copier is absent for

5 sec or more.

The belt clock pulses within 200 msec are

below the specified number.

The delivery motor clock pulses within

200 msec are below the specified number.

The output of the sensor is 2.3 V or more in

the absence of paper.

E400

E402

E404

E411

10-114

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Self Diagnosis (sorter)

Table 10-21

Note:

Some copiers use ‘E500’ to represent all the above errors.

■Error Condition

qThe copier indicates the “TURN ON POWER” message.

wWhen the power has been turned off and then on, the sorter runs a self check: if the

result is good*, it resets; otherwise, enters down state**.

■Down State

qThe copier indicates ‘E5XX’.

wWhen the sorter has been detached, the copier is available for operations other than

those that must use the sorter.

eIf a mode that uses the sorter is selected, some copiers indicate the “MODE NOT

AVAILABLE” message.

Code Cause

The CPU or the communica-

tions IC on the sorter controller

is not operating normally.

The feeder motor fails to rotate.

The stapler guide bar swing

motor fails to rotate.

The stapler unit swing motor

fails to rotate.

The bin shift motor fails to

rotate.

• Bin motor (faulty)

• Reed cam drive gear (faulty

mounting)

Description

An error is detected in the communication

between the sorter and the copier.

The clock signal from the motor is off for

250 msec or more.

The home position sensor does not turn off

after generation of 2560 pulses of the motor

drive signal.

• The stapler unit swing sensor does not

turn off within 0.5sec after generation of

the motor drive signal.

• The sensor does not turn on again within

1.0sec after the stapler unit swing sensor

has turned off.

• The reed cam home position sensor does

not turn off within 2.0sec after generation

of the motor drive signal.

• The reed cam home position sensor does

not turn on once again within

2.0sec after it has turned off.

The reed cam position sensor does not turn

on within 1.0 sec after it has turned off.

E500

E510

E530

E531

E540

E541

10-115

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Note:

Even in down state, the sorter will run a self check and rest if the result is good if

you have switched it off and then on without detaching it from the copier.

* Simply turn off the joint sensor (MS3) to detach the sorter from the copier; you

need not disconnect the communication connector.

** When an E code is indicated.

10-116

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

APPENDIX

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ...............A-1

B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS......A-2

C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.........A-3

D. SPECIAL TOOLS ...............................A-5

E. SOLVENTS/OILS................................A-6

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART

(A4, 2 copies, Direct, from copier cassette)

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-1

Sequence STBY INTR

AER

SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV

LSTR

STBY

Main motor (M1)

Pre-exposure lamp

Primary charging (APVC)

Primary charging bias

Scanning motor (M2)

Scanning lamp (FL1)

Image exposure

Transfer cleaning bias

Transfer bias

Static eliminator bias

Developing bias (AC)

Developing bias (DC)

Fixing heater (H1)

Heat exhaust fan (FM1)

Environment heater (H3)

Fluorescent lamp heater (H2)

Blanking shutter solenoid

(SL3)

Transfer reference bias

(ATVC)

Registration sensor (PS6)

Separation sensor (PS7)

Delivery sensor (PS8)

Scanner home position

sensor (PS1)

Power switch

0 5 10 15 20 25 30

Copy start key

Pick-up clutch (CL2)

Registration clutch (CL1)

B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS

1. Signals and Abbreviations

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-2

ACBIAS DEVELOPING AC BIAS VOLTAGE DETECTION signal

AE AE SENSOR OUTPUT signal AE

AEREF AE SENSOR REFERENCE signal AE

ATTH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR signal

BIASS DEVELOPING DC BIAS VOLTAGE DETECTION signal

BPWM DEVELOPING BIAS DRIVE command

BSHP BLANKING SHUTTER HOME POSITION signal

BSSLD BLANKING SHUTTER SOLENOID DRIVE command

C2PUCLD CASSETTE2 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command

C2SZ-1 CASSETTE2 SIZE signal

C2SZ-2 CASSETTE2 SIZE signal

C2SZ-3 CASSETTE2 SIZE signal

C2SZ-4 CASSETTE2 SIZE signal

C2PD CASSETTE2 PAPER DETECTION signal

C2VPD CASSETTE2 VERTICAL PATH PAPER DETECTION signal

C3PD CASSETTE3 PAPER DETECTION signal

C3PUCLD CASSETTE3 PICK-UP CLUCTH DRIVE command

C3SZ-1 CASSETTE3 SIZE signal

C3SZ-2 CASSETTE3 SIZE signal

C3SZ-3 CASSETTE3 SIZE signal

C3SZ-4 CASSETTE3 SIZE signal

C3VPD CASSETTE3 VERTICAL PATH PAPER DETECTION signal

CCD CONTROL CARD DRIVE command

CCDT CONTROL CARD DETECTION signal

CDC COPY DENSITY CORRECTION signal

CHSLD CHANGE SOLENOID DRIVE command

CMA CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command A

CMA* CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command A*

CMB CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command B

CMB* CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command B

CMD CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR DRIVE command

CPD CASSETTE PAPER DETECTION signal

CRDOP CASSETTE RIGHT DOOR OPEN signal

CS CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION command

CS2 CASSETTE2 SIZE DETECTION command

CS3 CASSETTE3 SIZE DETECTION command

CSZ-1 CASSETTE SIZE signal 1

CSZ-2 CASSETTE SIZE signal 2

CSZ-3 CASSETTE SIZE signal 3

CSZ-4 CASSETTE SIZE signal 4

DPD DELIVERY PAPER DETECTION signal

EHTRL EARTH RL DRIVE command RL2

FFA FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command A

FFA* FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command A*

FFB FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command B

FFB* FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command

FFCA FUSER FILM MOTOR VOLTAGE command A

FFCB FUSER FILM MOTOR VOLTAGE command B

FFD FIXING FILM POSITION signal

FLHT OFF FLUORESCENT LAMP HETER OFF command

FL ON FLUORESCENT LAMP ON command

FLPRHT FLUORESCENT LAMP PRE-HEAT command

FLS FLUORESCENT LAMP INTENSITY signal

FLTH FLUORESCENT LAMP THERMISTOR signal

FLTH ON FLUORESCENT LAMP HETER ON command

FMD FUSER FILM MOTOR DRIVE command

HEFD HEAT EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command

HTNG FUSER HEATER NG signal

HTRD HEATER DRIVE command

JCTL DISCHARGE BIAS DRIVE command

JLVCTL DISCHARGE BIAS CHANGE command

LHP LENS HOME POSITION signal

LID LIGHT INTENSITY signal

LNSA LENS MOTOR PULSE command A

LNSA* LENS MOTOR PULSE command A*

LNSB LENS MOTOR PULSE command B

LNSB* LENS MOTOR PULSE command B*

LNSC-A LENS MOTOR DRIVE command A

LNSC-B LENS MOTOR DRIVE command B

MFPD MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal

MFPUCLD MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command

MFPWD MULTIFEEDER PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal

MFSLD MULTIFEEDER SOLENOID DRIVE command

MLOCK MAIN MOTER LOCK signal

MMCLK MAIN MOTOR CLOCK signal

MMD MAIN MOTER DRIVE command

MPWM MAIN PULSE command

PCLSLD PRIMARY CORONA ROLLER CLEANING SOLENOID command

PDCPWM PRIMARY CORONA DETECT PULSE command

PDCS PRIMARY CORONA DETECT command

PEXP PRE-EXPOSURE LAMP LIT command

PUCLD PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command

PWSW POWER SWITCH command

RDOP RIGHT DOOR OPEN signal

RGCLD REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE command

RPD REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal

SC-A SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command A

SC-A* SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command A*

SC-B SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command B

SC-B* SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command B*

SC-COMA SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE command A

SC-COMB SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE command B

SCHP SCANNE HOME POSITION signal

SPD SEPARATION PAPER DETECTION signal

SRSW SERVICE MODE SWITCH signal

TCNTD TOTAL COUNTER DRIVE command

TEP TONER EMPTY signal

TFWON TRNSFER BIAS ON/OFF command

TFWPWM TRNSFER BIAS LOW VOLTAGE signal

TFWS TRNSFER BIAS PULSE command

TH 1 FIXING MAIN THERMISTOR signal

TH 2 FIXING SUB THERMISTOR signal

TREVON TRNSFER REVERSE ON command

C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-3

not available

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-4

D. SPECIAL TOOLS

See the table for the special tools used to service the machine in addition to the

standard tools set.

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

APPENDIX

A-5

No.

Tool name

Door switch

actuator

Mirror

positioning tool

(comes in

pairs; front,

rear)

Pulley clip

Tool No.

TKN-0093-000

FY9-3009-040

FY9-3010-000

Shape

Point of use

Front door

Rank

Remarks

For adjusting the

distance between

No. 1 and No. 2

mirrors.

For fixing the

scanning cable in

place.

E. SOLVENTS/OILS

1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

APPENDIX

A-6

No.

Name

Ethl alcohol

(Ethanol)

Isopropyl

alcohol

(Isopropanol)

MEK

Heat-resis-

tant grease

Lubricating

oil (low

viscosity)

Lubricating

oil (low

viscosity)

Lubricating

oil

Use

Cleaning:

copyboard glass,

mirror, etc.

Removing toner

or oil stains

Lubricating the

drive

mechanisms;

e.g., copyboard

driving gear,

fixing drive gear,

fixing ass’y, etc.

Lubrication points:

Scanner rail, etc.

Lubrication point:

oneway clutch in

pick-up control

assembly

Lubrication point:

friction parts

Composition

C2H5OH

(CHZ3)2CHOH

CH3• CO • C2H5

Methylethyl ketone

ISO VG 68 oil

ESSO Febis K68

MOBIL Vactraoil No. 2

SHELL Tonna oil T68

ISO VG 220 oil

ESSO Febis K220

MOBIL Vactraoil No. 4

Silicone oil

Description

• Flammable.

• Use in a well ventilated

area.

• Avoid breathing

concentrated vapor.

• Flammable.

• Use in a well-ventilated

area and avoid breathing

concentrated vapor.

• Avoid contact with eyes or

skin.

• Do not use for cleaning

the drum, plastic molded

parts, or corona wires.

Tool No.: CK-0427 (500g can)

(Equivqlent grease can be

used, but should be able to

withstand 200°C for

extended periods of time.)

Equivalent oil can be used.

Tool No.: CK-0451 (100cc)

Equivalent oil can be used.

Tool No.: CK-0524 (100cc).

Tool No.: CK-0551 (20g)

Prepared by

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPT. 1

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIV.

CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

REVISION 0 (MAY 1997) [31625]

5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302 Japan

PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

0797S0.7-2

This publication is printed on

70% reprocessed paper.

Canon Copier Fy8 13Ex 000 Users Manual Ppre

FY8-13EX-000 to the manual ab817b7c-a77d-4ef4-a507-c3ae8fab7819

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation